JP5068847B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a coin gaming machine, and more particularly, to a starting area where a predetermined starting condition is established when a gaming medium is provided in the gaming area and the starting condition is established. Based on the variable display device for performing the variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on each of them and deriving and displaying the display result, a first state that is advantageous to the player and disadvantageous to the player Variable prize winning means that can change to any one of the second states, and the variable display unit when the display result of the variable information display of the identification information is a predetermined specific display result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player who changes a winning means to the first state.

  Generally known as this type of gaming machine is a starting area where a predetermined starting condition is established when a game ball as a game medium is provided in the gaming area, and the starting condition is established. Based on the above, a variable display device that displays a variation of a plurality of types of identification information such as symbols that can be identified and derives and displays the display result, and a first state (open) that is provided in the game area and is advantageous to the player. There is a pachinko gaming machine provided with variable winning means that can be changed to either a state) or a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player. In such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol), the variable winning means having a big winning opening is set in the first state. It is controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player to be changed. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, after the end of the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than the normal gaming state different from the specific gaming state. Be controlled.

  Some of such gaming machines are controlled as follows. As a first example, as a specific gaming state that becomes a high probability state after completion, a plurality of types of probability variation big hit states (true exact variable big hit state, pseudo-probability big hit state, which are different in ease of winning a big winning opening in the specific gaming state. (Patent document 1).

  As a second example, there are provided a plurality of gaming states such as a low probability state and a high probability state with different probabilities of becoming a big hit gaming state, and a variation shortening state that shortens the variation time of symbols such as normal symbols. In some cases, the game state is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and then the control is performed to shift to the variation shortened state when the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (Patent Document 2).

  Further, as a third example, a normal winning state set as a normal winning state and a special winning state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal winning state are set, and the normal winning state is shifted to the special winning state. There is one that sets a plurality of times and performs control to automatically select one of the plurality of transition times (Patent Document 3).

  In addition, as a fourth example, a normal performance pattern that is displayed when a probability variable big hit symbol is displayed and controlled to a high probability state after the probability variable big hit symbol is displayed, There is one that performs control to select and execute an effect pattern from dummy effect patterns that are the same effect patterns as the effect patterns displayed when the jackpot symbol is displayed and then controlled in the time-saving state (Patent Document 4). ).

JP 2004-329876 A (paragraphs 0085-0090) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-118469 (paragraph 0051) Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-234945 (paragraphs 0051 and 0052, FIG. 3) JP 2004-208902 A (paragraphs 0189 to 0198)

  However, with regard to the conventional gaming machine described above, due to the following problems, it has not been possible to give the player much interest in the transition of the gaming state. In the gaming machine of the first example described above, since it is determined that a plurality of types of probable big hit states with different ease of winning a big winning opening result in a high probability state after a specific gaming state. I couldn't get much interest in the player about the state transition. Further, in the gaming machine of the second example described above, the big hit game is always shifted to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and is always shifted to the fluctuation shortened state when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times. Regardless of what gaming state the game state is when the state occurs, the relationship between the game state transition source and the transition destination is constant. As a result, it has not been possible to give the player much interest in how the gaming state shifts.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the third example described above, a plurality of transition times from the normal winning state to the special winning state are provided so that the player is interested in the transition of the gaming state. When the conditions for shifting from the special winning state to the special winning state are not satisfied, the player cannot be interested in the transition of the gaming state. Further, in the gaming machine of the fourth example described above, a dummy effect pattern that is displayed when controlled in the short-time state may be executed even when controlled in the high-probability state. There is a risk of lowering the expectation of the player, and there is a risk of reducing the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such a situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state caused by the specific gaming state.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

A start area (variable winning ball device 15) that is established in a game area (game area 7) and a predetermined start condition is established when a game medium (game ball) enters, and the start condition is established respectively. A variable display device (variable display device 9) that displays a display result by performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (decorative symbols) that can be identified, and a first that is provided in the game area and is advantageous to the player A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed between a state (open state) and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and the identification in the variable display device When the display result of the variable display of information becomes a predetermined specific display result (a jackpot display result), it is controlled to a specific game state advantageous to the player who changes the variable winning means to the first state. A technique machine (pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the specific gaming state, a first gaming state (15R normal big hit, 15R probability big hit A, 15R chance big big hit B) in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period (30 seconds) a predetermined number of times (15 times) . ) To control the first game state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S41, S43a, S43b in FIG. 53, S452, S453, S456 in FIG. 57, S146 in FIG. 51),
After executing the second gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period or a number less than the predetermined number, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. A second gaming state control means for controlling to a high probability state in which the resulting probability is improved over the normal state;
After executing the third gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for the same period as the second gaming state and the same number of times as the second gaming state, the variable winning means is changed to the first state. A third gaming state control means for controlling to the previous gaming state;
Whether to control to the specific gaming state, whether to control to the first gaming state , whether to control to the second gaming state , and whether to control to the third gaming state Predetermining means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S25 and S28 in FIG. 52, S41 in FIG. 53) for determining before displaying and displaying the display result of the display,
The pre-determining means is further configured to display the change display as a state after the second gaming state when the gaming state when it is determined to control to the second gaming state is a normal state different from the specific gaming state. A first high probability state (highly probable low base state) in which the probability that the display result is the specific display result is higher than that in the normal state and the ease of entering the game medium into the starting area is the same as in the normal state ) Or the probability that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is the same as that of the first high probability state, and the game medium is set to enter the start area more easily than the first high probability state. If the game state when the control state is determined to be controlled to the second high probability state (high probability high base state) and the second game state is determined to be the second high probability state, the second as the state of the post-game state Decided to control to the second high-probability state (S704 to S709 in FIG. 61, S721 of FIG. 63, FIG. 17),
The specific game state when the game state when it is determined to control to the specific game state is the normal state and the high probability state including the first high probability state and the second high probability state The ratio controlled to the high probability state as the later state is the same (FIG. 16),
It is an effect mode that is performed corresponding to the normal state in each of the first high probability state after being controlled to the second gaming state and the normal state after being controlled to the third gaming state. It further includes an effect state control means for performing control to switch to a specific effect state that is a common effect mode different from the normal effect state,
The effect state control means is configured such that when the change to the specific effect state is performed after the control to the second gaming state, the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is the specific display result. Until this time, control for switching to the normal performance state is not performed.

According to such a configuration, when the gaming state determined to be controlled to the second gaming state is the normal state, the state after the second gaming state is the first high probability state or the second high probability. When it is decided to control to the state and the gaming state when it is decided to control to the second gaming state is the second high probability state, the state after the second gaming state is controlled to the second high probability state It is decided. Thereby, even if it is the same specific game state about a 2nd game state which changes a variable winning means to a 1st state at least in any one of a period shorter than a predetermined period, and a frequency | count less than a predetermined number, a specific game state is Since the state to be transferred differs depending on the state at the time of occurrence, it is possible to give a strong interest to the player as to how the game state changes with respect to the change of the game state due to the specific game state. Further, by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the specific gaming state. Also, in any state of being controlled in the normal state and in the state of being controlled in the second high probability state, when entering the second gaming state , it shifts to a state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the current state. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player's expectation is lowered due to the second gaming state . Also, a normal performance state that is a performance mode performed in accordance with the normal state in each of the first high probability state after being controlled to the second gaming state and the normal state after being controlled to the third gaming state Is switched to a specific effect state that is a common effect mode different from. Furthermore, when switching to the specific effect state is performed after being controlled to the second gaming state, it is switched to the normal effect state until the display result of the variation display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes the specific display result. Absent.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front surface of the game board in the state which removed the glass door frame. It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game control board (main board). FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a main board and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of initial value change system selection data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a user program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a random number circuit setting program. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement with which CPU updates the value of R1, or reads the value of R1, when the 1st random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement which CPU updates the value of R1, or reads the value of R1, when the 2nd random number update system is selected. It is a figure for demonstrating the random counter used in order that the microcomputer for game control may generate the random numbers used for game control. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the various random counters which the microcomputer for effect control uses for effect control. It is a figure which shows each characteristic of each hit including various big hits and small hits in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game control state at the time of winning occurrence, the type of winning, and the game control state after winning. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship between the kind of winning about a game control state, and a state change, and the relationship between a hit about state control mode and a state change. It is a figure which shows the data table at the time of a low probability low base in a table format. It is a figure which shows the data table at the time of a highly accurate low base in a table format. It is a figure which shows the data table at the time of a highly accurate high base in tabular form. It is a figure which shows the data table at the time of low accuracy base in a table format. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command in a table form. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command in a table form. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the control state of a pachinko game machine, and the symbol determination frequency | count 1 signal output as an information signal. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the control state of a pachinko gaming machine, and one jackpot signal output as an information signal. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the control state of a pachinko game machine, and two jackpot signals output as an information signal. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the control state of a pachinko game machine, and the probability fluctuation 2 signal output as an information signal. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the control state of a pachinko game machine, and the probability fluctuation 1 signal output as an information signal. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the control state of a pachinko game machine, and three jackpot signals output as an information signal. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 2R probability change big hit B in a normal mode, and the example of a small hit display. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of miss chance chance in a normal mode, and the example of a display of 2R probability variation big hit A. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B in the 1st mission mode, and the example of a small hit display. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a missed opportunity display in 1st mission mode, and the example of a display when a mission period is complete | finished without a mission being achieved. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 15R normal jackpot A when a primary re-lottery display and a secondary re-lottery display are performed. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 15R probability variation big hit B, and the example of a display of 15R normal big hit when secondary re-lottery display is performed without primary re-lottery display. It is a display screen figure which shows a display example when it becomes 15R probability variation big hit A without performing a primary re-lottery display and a secondary re-lottery display. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 2R probability variation big hit B in the 2nd mission mode, and the example of a small hit display. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 2R probability variation big hit A in 2nd mission mode, and the example of a display of 15R normal big hit when the secondary re-lottery display is performed without performing the primary re-lottery display. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, or small hit in probability variation mode. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of 2R probability change big hit A or 2R probability change big hit B, and the example of a small hit in time-short mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number maximum value reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value change process. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random number circuit, and the timing when each signal is generated in a random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value update process. It is a flowchart which shows a count value permutation change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop symbol setting process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol information determination process in a special symbol stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening pre-processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize process opening process in a special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit | end process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game process in a winning end process. It is a flowchart which shows the low probability low base process in a special game process. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability low base process in a special game process. It is a flowchart which shows the high-precision high-base process in a special game process. It is a flow cheat showing a low-accuracy base process in a special game process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result determination process in a symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the game state management process in a symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a hit game.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine, when a gaming medium is provided in a gaming area. A start area where a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display device for performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable based on the start condition being satisfied, and deriving and displaying a display result, A variable winning means provided in the game area and capable of changing to either a first state advantageous to the player or a second state unfavorable to the player, and the variation of the identification information in the variable display device when the display result of the display becomes specific display results predetermined there in the gaming machine that is controlled to an advantageous specific game state for the player for changing said variable winning device in the first state It may be.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front, and FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the game balls. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (decorative symbol display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display regions each displaying a decorative symbol for effect. In addition, a special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other is provided at the top of the variable display device 9. The fluctuation display device 9 has, for example, three fluctuation display areas (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variation display device 9 performs a variation display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variation display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer 800 (see FIG. 4) mounted on an effect control board 80 described later.

  Below the variable display device 9 are provided four special symbol hold memory indicators 18 for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ing. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol hold memory display 18 increases the stored data in the hold memory by 1 and increases the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. Each time the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display, the special symbol storage memory display 18 decreases the storage data of the storage by 1 and decreases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, one LED Is turned off. Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state every time the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display. In this example, an upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of reserved storage by winning to the start winning opening 14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper limit number of the reserved storage number may be a value of 4 or more, or may be a value less than 4.

  The special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to display various numbers such as 0 to 99 in a variable manner in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of winning. In addition, the variable display device 9 displays a variable display of decorative symbols as decorative (designated) symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified during the variable symbol display period of the special symbols by the special symbol indicator 8. To do.

  Below the variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15 that forms a start winning opening 14 is provided. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is a means for opening and closing the big winning opening. Of the winning balls that are won in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 and guided to the back of the game board 6, the winning ball that has entered one (V winning area: special area) is detected by the V winning switch 22 and then counted by the count switch 23. The game ball that has been detected and entered the other region is detected by the count switch 23 as it is. On the back of the game board 6, a solenoid 21A for switching the route in the special winning opening is also provided.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display change display of the normal symbol display 10 that changes the normal symbol as a plurality of types of identification information is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized at the time of lighting) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, if the left lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate 32, that is, the start passing memory number, is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, the memory data of the start passage memory is incremented by 1, and the normal symbol start memory display 41 increments the LED to be lit by 1. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the stored data of the start passage memory is decreased by 1, and the LED to be lit is decreased by 1.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning. Around the left and right of the game area 7, there are provided decorative lamps 25 blinking and displayed during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for absorbing a game ball that has not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In this example, a prize ball lamp 51 that is lit during the payout of a prize ball is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is lit when the supply ball has run out is in the vicinity of the right lamp 28c. Is provided. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various light emitting means such as a prize ball lamp 51, a ball break lamp 52, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are controlled to be lit (lamp control) by a lamp driver board 35 described later. . Further, sound generation control (sound control) from the speaker 27 is performed by an audio output board 70 described later.

  The card unit 50 includes, for example, a usable display lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit 50 is in a usable state, a connected table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit 50, and a card. A card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted into the unit 50, a card insertion slot into which a card as a recording medium is inserted, and a card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back surface of the card insertion slot are inspected. In some cases, a card unit lock for releasing the card unit 50 is provided.

  A game ball launched from the ball striking device by the player's operation enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 starts the variable display if the variation display of the symbol can be started. If the symbol display cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The special symbol change display on the special symbol display 8 stops when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result), it will be a jackpot and the game will shift to a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins. Then, when the game ball is won in the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 22 while the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right varies depending on the type of jackpot, and a predetermined number of times such as 15 rounds or 2 rounds is allowed as the upper limit value. Such control is called repeated continuation control. In the case of this embodiment, the types of jackpots are 15 round jackpots (hereinafter referred to as 15R jackpots) in which the continuation right continues for up to 15 rounds, and 2 round jackpots (hereinafter referred to as 2R jackpots) in which the continuation right continues for two rounds. And are provided. In the case of 15R jackpot, the generation of continuation rights is checked based on whether or not the game ball has won the V winning area in each round as described above, but in the case of 2R jackpot, the game ball is played in the first round. Control is made so that the continuation right is generated unconditionally without checking the generation of the continuation right based on whether or not the V winning area is won. As a result, in the case of 2R big hit, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened and closed twice regardless of whether or not the game ball wins the V winning area. In addition, without providing the V winning area, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may always be allowed to be released up to the final round (for example, up to 15 rounds). In addition, for the 2R jackpot, the generation of the continuation right may be checked based on whether or not the game ball has won the V winning area in the first round. Even in the case of 15R big hit, it may be controlled so that the continuation right is generated unconditionally until the final round, and by doing so, the control contents are shared by 15R big hit and 2R big hit, Control complexity can be suppressed.

  When the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage is a predetermined special big-hit symbol (probability variation big-hit symbol) of the big-hit symbols, the probability of becoming a big-hit after the big-hit gaming state is different from the big-hit gaming state This is a more advantageous state for the player, that is, a probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state) that becomes higher than a normal game state (a low probability low base state, which will be described later). Hereinafter, the probability variation state is also referred to as a high probability state (sometimes abbreviated as a high probability state). Further, the non-probable change state is also referred to as a low probability state (sometimes abbreviated as a low probability state). In this embodiment, as the 15R big hit described above, there are provided a 15R positive change big hit that becomes a probability change state after the big hit gaming state and a 15R normal big hit that does not become a positive change state after the big hit gaming state. In addition, as the 2R big hit described above, a 2R positive change big hit that becomes a probable change state after the big hit gaming state is provided.

  The big hit game state by 15R normal big hit is called 15R normal big hit game state. Also, the big hit gaming state by 15R probability variable big hit is called 15R probability variable big hit gaming state. Also, the big hit gaming state due to the 2R probability variable big hit is called a 2R probability variable big hit gaming state. Further, the 15R normal big hit gaming state and the 15R probability variable big hit gaming state may be collectively referred to as a 15R big hit gaming state. In addition, the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state may be referred to as a 2R big hit big hit gaming state.

  Also, when the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage is a predetermined small hit symbol, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened and closed twice in the same manner as in the big hit gaming state with 2R probability variable big hit. It becomes a small hit that becomes a hit state (hereinafter referred to as a small hit gaming state). Specifically, in the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to open and close twice as a predetermined series of operations, and such a series of operations is performed only once. As a result, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened and closed twice. More specifically, in the small hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened for the same time as the first round of 2R probability variable big hit, the interval between the first and second rounds of 2R probability variable big hit. It is closed for the same time as the time, and further opened for the same time as the second round per 2R probability variation big, and then closed. In such a small hit, the gaming state after the small hit gaming state is the same as the gaming state before the small hit gaming state.

  The various big hits and small hits shown above may be collectively called hits. Further, the various big hit big hit game states and the small hit game state described above may be collectively referred to as a hit game state.

  The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the variable display device 9 are variably displayed in a predetermined relationship with the special symbol variation display in order to enhance the decoration effect of the special symbol variation display in the special symbol display 8. There is an implication. The predetermined relationship for such symbols includes, for example, the relationship in which the decorative symbol variation display is started when the special symbol variation display is started, and the special symbol variation display is terminated and the display result is displayed. And the like, such as the relationship that the display of the variation of the decorative pattern ends and the display result is displayed. When the special symbol display 8 derives and displays a big hit symbol (for example, an odd number of symbols) as a display result, the variable display device 9 has a combination of big hit symbols in which the left, middle, and right symbols are flat or chance. Derived and displayed as a display result. The display result of such a jackpot symbol combination is called a jackpot display result.

  Since the special symbol display 8 and the fluctuation display device 9 have the correspondence relationship as described above, the fluctuation display results may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation display unit in the following description.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in the present embodiment means that the symbols that have not been stopped when the stopped symbols constitute a part of the jackpot symbol, and that all or This is a state where some symbols are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, in the variable display device 9, an effective line (one effective line in the case of the present embodiment) that becomes a big hit when the symbol stops is determined in advance, and a part of the display area on the effective line is displayed. A state in which the variable display is performed in the display area on the active line that has not been stopped when the predetermined symbol is stopped (for example, among the left, middle, and right display areas in the variable display device 9) The left and right display areas are stopped and the same display is still displayed, and the middle display area is still in the variable display mode), and all or part of the display area on the active line A state in which all or a part of the jackpot symbol is formed and displayed in a synchronized manner (for example, the left, middle and right display areas in the variation display device 9 are displayed in a variable manner, and are always displayed. The state) variable display in a state in which one of the symbols are aligned is made that reach the display mode or reach.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the variable display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display is a variable display that is 15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit, and when 15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit game is being performed. In each of the cases, a re-lottery display may be performed on the variable display device 9. The re-lottery display is a display for performing an effect indicating whether or not the probability variation state is to be achieved. For example, whether or not the ornamental design is temporarily stopped with a display result in which the decorative symbol does not become the probability variation state, and then whether or not the probability variation big hit is obtained. Displaying an image indicating that a lottery will be performed again. Here, the temporary stop means that, in the variable display, after temporarily displaying the symbol at a timing before the end timing of the variable display for deriving and displaying the display result, the symbol is temporarily displayed when the variable display is performed again. Stop (temporary stop) display. In such a re-lottery display, when the display result of the variable display is a combination of jackpot symbols, it is possible to give the player an enjoyment of whether the combination of the probability variation jackpot symbol or the normal jackpot symbol is combined. . The re-lottery display is not performed when the 2R probability variable big hit variation display is performed and when the 2R probability variable big hit game is being performed.

  The re-lottery display includes a plurality of re-lottery displays including a primary re-lottery display and a secondary re-lottery display. The primary re-lottery display is a temporary stop symbol at a timing before the end timing of the variable display for deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display in the variable display that triggers the 15R normal big hit or the 15R probability variable big hit. This is a display in which the combination of the non-probable big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the variable display is started again, and then the non-probable big hit symbol combination or the probabilistic big hit symbol combination is derived and displayed (stop display). In addition, the secondary re-lottery display provides an effect indicating whether or not the game will be in the probable change state after the 15R normal big hit game state or the 15R probable big hit game state is controlled. It is a display. Specifically, the secondary re-lottery display is performed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit gaming state is set, the control for surely performing the secondary re-lottery display is executed. The reason is that when the display result of the variable display that triggers the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, that is, when the combination of symbols derived and displayed as the display result before the big hit gaming state becomes a combination of the non-probable big hit symbol This is because the player's interest may not be recognized unless the re-lottery display is performed so that the player is not controlled to be in a probable variation state. On the other hand, when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached, whether or not to perform the secondary re-lottery display is determined at random, and control for performing the secondary re-lottery display is executed according to the determination.

  In this embodiment, the display result of the variation display of the decorative symbol is the display result of the variation display that triggers the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (the display result derived and displayed before the big hit gaming state, (Including the display result when the lottery display is performed) is a combination of the probable big hit symbols, or the secondary re-lottery display that may be performed at the end of the big win gaming state, When the state becomes either one of the two, the probability variation state occurs.

  Further, for the variable display device 9, there is a case where a big hit notice, which is a notice effect for notifying that a big hit is given, is performed in the variable display that triggers the generation of the big hit.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 is in a state where the normal symbol is variably displayed. Further, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a predetermined condition is established, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the time-short state, which is a variable time shortening state. The short-time state means that each of the variable display times (variation start) of the special symbol display 8, the variable display device 9, and the normal symbol display 10 described later is compared with the normal gaming state (a low probability low base state described later). This is a control state in which the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage by shortening the time from display time to display result derivation display. Furthermore, during the time-shortening state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is lengthened, and the number of times of opening is increased. In the short-time state, the display time of the fluctuation of the symbol is shortened, so that the number of reserved memories to be described later is exhausted early, and the start winnings that have occurred exceeding the upper limit (for example, “4”) of the number of reserved memories are invalidated. Since the display results are frequently derived and displayed in a short period of time and it is easy to derive and display the winning display results at an early stage, the display result of the variable display becomes the display result of the big hit symbol from a time efficient viewpoint. It becomes easy and it becomes a game state advantageous for a player.

  Further, when considering from the aspect of paying out the game ball according to the winning, in the short time state, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the non-time short state, and the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes the winning symbol. Based on the fact that the probability is increased, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 at the time of winning is increased, and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 at the time of hitting is increased once, it is variable compared with the normal gaming state. Since the winning ball device 15 is likely to be in an open state, it is easy to generate a winning (including both a case where the starting winning is valid and a case where the starting winning is invalid) at the start winning opening 14, so that the player is driven into the game area 7. The ratio of the number of game balls (number of payout balls) to be paid out as prize balls according to the winnings with respect to the number of game balls (number of hit balls) is larger than that in the normal game state. In general, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls by winning a prize to the number of shot balls is called “base”. For example, when there are 40 payout balls for 100 shots, the base is 40 (%). In the case of this embodiment, for example, a time-short state having a higher base than a non-time-short state such as a normal gaming state is called a high base state, and conversely, a normal gaming state having a lower base compared to such a high base state Such a non-time-short state is called a low base state.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like. Various boards such as a mounted game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board (not shown), and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control is mounted. Is installed.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. Although most of the power supply substrate 910 overlaps with the main substrate 31, there is an exposed portion that is exposed so as to be visible from the outside without overlapping the main substrate 31. The exposed portion is supplied with the main board 31 and each electrical component control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (electric power) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is provided a power switch as a power supply permission means for executing or shutting off the power supply to the component operating by this. Furthermore, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch in the exposed portion (inside the substrate).

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, variable display device 9, lamp) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. And light emitters such as LEDs, speakers 27, etc.). Hereinafter, description may be made by including the main board 31 in the electric component control board. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and means for controlling the electrical components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal from the game control means and the like. Each of them. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 160 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 160 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting prize ball information (prize ball number signal) and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided. Near the center, an information terminal board (information output board) 36 provided with terminals for outputting various information from the main board 31 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. A ball break switch 187 as a game medium break detection means is provided on the upper part of the ball payout device. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (in the storage tank 38). (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning prizes or game balls based on ball lending requests are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 becomes full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. 4 also shows a payout control board 37, a lamp driver board 35, an audio output board 70, an interface board 66, a relay board 77, and an effect control board 80 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. . The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560 that is a basic circuit (corresponding to a game control means) for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 14a, a V winning switch 22, a count An input driver circuit 58 for supplying signals from the switch 23, winning a prize switch 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and all winning counting switch 34 to the game control microcomputer 560, a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, a special An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560, and a command from the game control microcomputer 560 According to An information output circuit 53 for outputting various information signals to a device provided outside the pachinko game machine 1, such as a Hall computer is mounted.

  It should be noted that switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the V winning switch 22, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, the all winning count switch 34, and the like may be referred to as sensors. . That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. Each of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a for detecting the winning is also a winning detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Even if a pass gate such as the gate 32 is used, a game ball enters the pass gate if the prize ball is paid out, and a switch (for example, a switch provided in the pass gate (for example, The gate switch 32a) becomes a winning detection means. Furthermore, a game ball that has won the V winning area is detected by the V winning switch 22 and also by the count switch 23. Therefore, the number of game balls won in the special winning opening corresponds to the number detected by the count switch 23. However, the game balls won in the V prize area are detected only by the V prize switch 22, and the number of game balls won in the big prize opening is determined by the number detected by the V prize switch 22 and the number detected by the count switch 23. You may make it become the sum. Further, the V winning area may not be provided, and a continuation right may always be generated in rounds other than the final round.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means (variation data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory, and a program. Therefore, the CPU 56 that performs the control operation and the I / O port 506 are included. The ROM 54, the RAM 55, and the I / O port 506 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 and the I / O port 506 may be external or built-in.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 is specifically executed (or performs processing) hereinafter. The CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a game control microcomputer 560 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is also input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer stop operating. It becomes a state. Therefore, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowance signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output, and during the period in which the reset signal is at a low level, An operation stop signal for stopping the operations of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (including the main board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of electric component control boards, and a reset signal is output therefrom. May be supplied to another electric component control board.

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560 via the payout control board 37. In addition, a clear signal indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  The clear signal is branched in the main board 31 and is also supplied to the payout control board 37. Note that the state of the clear signal input by the game control microcomputer 560 via the input port may be output to the payout control board 37 via the output port.

  The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command (effect control signal) as a control signal for instructing effect control including display control, sound control, and lamp control to the effect control board 80. The effect control board 80 receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 and performs an electric component control means such as an effect control microcomputer 800 for performing display control in the variable display device 9. Is installed.

  The effect control microcomputer 800 includes a ROM 84 that stores a display control program, a RAM 85 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 86 that performs a display control operation according to the program, and an I / O port 87. This effect control microcomputer 800 controls various display effects such as the variable display of the variable display device 9 in response to the effect control command, the prize ball lamp 51, the ball-out lamp 52, the decoration lamp 25, and the ceiling lamp. Control relating to various effects including control of 28a, left frame lamp 28b and right frame lamp 28c (lamp control) and game sound generation control (sound control) using the speaker 27 is performed.

  In addition to the effect control microcomputer 800, the effect control board 80 is mounted with a VDP, a character ROM, and a VRAM (not shown). The VDP is a processing device having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function, and performs display control of the variable display device 9. CPU 86 reads necessary data from character ROM in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in advance.

  Then, the CPU 86 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP operates based on data input from the CPU 86. Each VDP has a two-dimensional address space independent of the CPU 86, and VRAM is mapped there. The VDP generates image data to be displayed on the variable display device 9 according to the image data of the character ROM, and the VDP expands the image data in the VRAM. VRAM is a frame buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. The image data developed in the VRAM is output to the variable display device 9.

  The production control microcomputer 800 outputs a sound such as a sound effect from the speaker 27 by outputting a drive signal of the speaker 27 to the sound output board 70. The effect control microcomputer 800 controls the light emitting means as described above by outputting drive signals of various light emitting means to the lamp driver board 35. Thus, sound control and light emission control are performed in response to (in synchronization with) the effect display on the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board 31 and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  As shown in FIG. 5, wiring from the start port switch 14a is connected to the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with wiring from a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 having a large winning opening, and various switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a for detecting a winning of a game ball to other winning holes, and the like. Connected (not shown). Further, the main board 31 is connected to a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and a wiring to the solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening. .

  The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58, an output circuit 59, and an information output circuit 53. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a clock circuit 501, a reset controller 502 that functions as a system reset means, random number circuits 503a and 503b, a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that is used as a work memory, and a program. A CPU 56 that operates, a CTC 504 that sends an interrupt request signal to the CPU, and an I / O port 506 are incorporated.

  The clock circuit 501 outputs a system clock signal to the CPU 56, and outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined period generated by dividing the system clock signal by 27 (= 128) to the random number circuits 503a and 503b. When a low level signal is input for a predetermined period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and the random number circuits 503a and 503b to reset the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits 503a and 503b having different ranges of values of random numbers that can be generated. The random number circuit 503a is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit 503a has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 1 to 4095). The random number circuit 503b is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo-random number. The 16-bit random number circuit 503b has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated by 16 bits (that is, a range from 1 to 65535). In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits is described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include three or more random number circuits. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are comprehensively expressed, or when indicating either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, This is called a random number circuit 503.

  Between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, eight signal lines CD0 to CD7 for transmitting an effect control command and a signal line for an effect control INT signal for transmitting a strobe signal are provided. ing.

  The effect control microcomputer 800 receives effect control commands from CD0 to CD7 at the capture timing indicated by the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 800 performs display control of the variable display device 9 and speaker 27 in order to perform display control, sound control and lamp control to be performed in response to the effect indicated by the received effect control command. Drive signals and various lamp drive signals. In such a configuration, when the effect control is performed based on the effect control command, the sound control and the lamp control are performed by the effect control microcomputer 800 in accordance with the display control of the variable display device 9. That is, in the effect control microcomputer, the display control of the variation display device 9 is performed based on the effect control command, and the sound control and the lamp control corresponding to the display control content are performed, whereby the display control of the variation display device 9 is performed. The sound control and the lamp control are performed (synchronized) in accordance with the production.

  Next, the configuration of the random number circuit 503 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 6, the random number circuit 503 includes a counter 521, a comparator 522, a count value permutation changing circuit 523, a clock signal output circuit 524, a count value update signal output circuit 525, a random value read signal output circuit 526, and a random number update. A system selection signal output circuit 527, a selector 528, a random number circuit start signal output circuit 530, a random value storage circuit 531, an inversion circuit 532, a latch signal generation circuit 533, and a timer circuit 534 are included.

  The random number circuit 503 generates a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information. When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the specific display result is based on the random number generated by the random number circuit 503, the game state is shifted to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. . It should be noted that a random number for determination other than the jackpot symbol, such as a random number for probability variation determination for determining whether or not the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is a probability variation, or a random number for variation pattern determination for determining a variation pattern for a special symbol. It may be used as

  The counter 521 receives a predetermined signal selected by the selector 528 and outputs a count value C in response to the signal input from the selector 528. In this case, the counter 521 inputs a predetermined initial value, and cyclically updates the count value C from the initial value to a predetermined final value according to a certain rule, and outputs it. Further, when the count value C is updated to the final value, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. When a notification signal is output from the counter 521, the initial value is updated by the CPU.

  The counter 521 counts up the count value C from “0” to “4095” by one each time a signal is input from the selector 528 (each time a rising edge in the signal from the selector 528 is input). Further, when the counter 521 counts up the count value C to “4095”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. Then, the CPU 56 inputs a notification signal from the counter 521 and updates the initial value. Then, the counter 521 counts up the count value C again from the initial value updated by the CPU 56 to “4095”. When counting up to “4095”, the counter 521 starts counting from “0” again. Then, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56 when it counts up to a value (final value) immediately before the updated initial value. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when all count values are input, as will be described later. In this case, when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the count value to “0”.

  The comparator 522 determines whether the input count value is larger than the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value is larger than the random number maximum value (exceeded the random number maximum value). ), A notification signal may be output to the counter 521. In this case, for example, when the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value, the notification signal is output to the counter 521 before the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. . For example, consider a case where the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, when the counter 521 counts up from “0” to “256” and further outputs the count value “257”, the comparator 522 causes the input count value “257” to exceed the random number maximum value “256”. A notification signal is output to the counter 521. When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 updates the count value to “258” and outputs it without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. By repeatedly executing the above processing, the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value while inputting from the count value “257” to “4095”, and stores the count value in the repeat counter 521. Output a notification signal. The counter 521 repeatedly updates the count value without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524 while the notification signal is input from the comparator 522. By doing so, until the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1, the count value is controlled to be counted up from “257” to “4095” at a high speed, Control is performed so that random numbers from “257” to “4095” are skipped (not stored in the random value storage circuit 531).

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 includes a count value permutation change register (RSC) 536, an update rule selection register (RRC) 542, and an update rule memory 543. The count value permutation change register 536 stores count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation (order of arrangement from the initial value to the final value), which is the update order of the count value C counted up by the counter 521. . When the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 displays the count value C permutation that the counter 521 counts up and updates. The permutation is changed to a different permutation from when “01h” is not stored. In this case, when the count value permutation change data “01h” is stored, the count value permutation change circuit 523 switches the update rule used for changing the count value permutation. When the counter 521 starts updating the count value after switching the update rule used for changing the count value permutation, the count value permutation change data in the count value permutation change register (RSC) 536 is “01h” by the CPU 56. ”To the initial value“ 0 (= 00h) ”(cleared).

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the update rule selection register 542. The update rule selection register 542 is a register that sets an update rule used for rearranging the order of count values output from the counter 521 (changing the permutation). By setting a register value in the update rule selection register 542, an update rule used for changing the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 is set. As shown in FIG. 7, the update rule selection register 542 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 3 can be written and read. In addition, the update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 4 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 4 to 7 of update rule selection register 542, the value read from bits 4 to 7 is all “0 (= 0000b)”.

  The value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 is changed from “0 (= 00h)” to “0” when the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536. 15 (= 0Fh) "is updated cyclically. That is, each time the count value permutation data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is incremented by “1” from “0”, and when it becomes “15”, Return to "0".

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the update rule memory 543. As shown in FIG. 8, the update rule memory 543 stores the value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 and the count value update rule in association with each other. In the example illustrated in FIG. 8, for example, when the register value 1 is set in the update rule selection register 542, it can be seen that the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 is changed using the update rule B. In FIG. 8, the update rule A is the same update rule as that for the counter 521 to update the count value C, and is stored in the update rule memory 543 in association with the register value “0”. Also, in the update rule memory 543, update rules B to P different from the update rule in which the counter 521 updates the count value C are stored in association with the register values “1” to “15”.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 first receives the final count value “4095” from the counter 521 first. Until then, the count value is output as it is according to the currently set update rule. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value update rule when the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 inputs the final value after the change (the value immediately before the initial value) from the counter 521, and updates the count value. Will be changed.

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 selects an update rule corresponding to the register value of the update rule selection register 542 from the update rule memory 543, and sets it as an update rule used for changing the count value permutation. When the counter 521 starts updating the count value again from the initial value “0” again, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from the initial value of the count value to the final value according to the set update rule. change. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts updating the count value in order from the changed initial value by the counter 521, according to the set update rule. The permutation from the initial value to the final value of the count value is changed. Then, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs a count value according to the changed permutation.

  In this embodiment, when the maximum random number value to be generated is limited by setting the random number maximum value in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 is configured to output the count value C Is limited to below the maximum random number, and the permutation is changed and output. For example, it is assumed that the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the update rule A to the update rule B to change the permutation of the count values. Shall. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation to “256 →” according to the update rule B based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522. Change to “255 →... → 0” and output.

  As described above, when the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 switches the update rule to use the permutation of the count value C. Change to output. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved.

  Next, an example of the operation when the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of the count values output from the counter 521 will be described. The CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” into the count value permutation change register 536 at a predetermined timing. Then, 1 is added to the register value of the update rule selection register 542. For example, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is updated from “0” to “1”. When the register value is updated, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates the “update rule A” corresponding to the register value “0” before the update until the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521 for the first time. The count value is updated according to "." At this time, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs count values in a permutation of “0 → 1 →... → 4095” according to the update rule A.

  When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects “update rule B” corresponding to the updated register value “1” from the update rule memory 543. To set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input count values after the initial value “0” again from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes and outputs the permutation of the count values according to the “update rule B” selected and set. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “0 → 1 →... → 4095” to “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” and outputs the count value.

  Thereafter, the count value permutation change register 536 is reset in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting the count value update operation in accordance with the updated update rule, as will be described later. Then, until the count value permutation change data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536 next time, the count value permutation change circuit 523 is a permutation that remains “4095 → 4094 →. Continue to output the count value.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written again to the count value permutation change register 536 by the CPU 56, the register value of the count value permutation change register 536 is updated from “1” to “2”. When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects and sets “update rule C” corresponding to the register value “2” from the update rule memory 543. . When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input count values after the initial value “0” again from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates and outputs the count value permutation according to the selected “update rule C”. For example, the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the permutation from “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” to “1 → 3 →... → 4095 → 0 →. To do.

  As described above, the count value permutation register 536 is reset, and then the count value permutation data “01h” is written again into the count value permutation change register 536, whereby the permutation of the count values can be further changed.

  The count value permutation change register 536 is a register that sets count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation of count values counted up by the counter 521. The count value permutation change register 536 is a readable 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that only bit 0 can be written and read. That is, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 1 to 7 of count value permutation change register 536, the values read from bits 1 to 7 are all “0 (= 0000000b)”.

  Note that the value of the count value permutation change register 536 is reset by the CPU 56 in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting the update operation of the count value according to the updated update rule. In this case, the CPU 56 returns the value written in the count value permutation change register 536 from the count value permutation change data “01h” to the initial value “0 (= 00h)”.

  The comparator 522 includes a random number maximum value setting register (RMX) 535 that stores random number maximum value setting data for designating the maximum value (random number maximum value) of the random value R1. The comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value updated by the counter 521 in accordance with the random number maximum value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The comparator 522 compares the count value input from the counter 521 with the random number maximum value (for example, “256”) indicated in the random number maximum value setting data (for example, “00FFh”) stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. To do. When the comparator 522 determines that the input count value is equal to or less than the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531.

  Specifically, the comparator 522 performs the following control. The comparator 522 obtains the initial value of the count value from the CPU 56 when updating the initial value of the count value, and obtains the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number. For example, when the initial value of the count value is “157” and the maximum random number value is “256”, the comparator 522 calculates the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number value as “100”. Further, the comparator 522 counts up how many count values are input from the initial value as the count values are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the number of input count values from the initial value reaches “100”, the comparator 522 determines that all count values from the initial value “157” to the maximum value “256” have been input. Then, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input to the counter 521. By determining based on the number of count values, even when the count value permutation circuit 523 has changed the count value permutation, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the maximum random number or less. When all count values are input, a notification signal can be output to the counter 521.

  An operation in which the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value will be described. In this example, the case where the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects the update rule A and the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 will be described.

  While the counter 521 is updating the count value from “0” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In accordance with rule A, the count values from “0” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 receives the value of the random number maximum value “256” from the comparator 522, determines whether the count value input from the counter 521 is larger than the random number maximum value, and the update rule is changed. Even when it is set (for example, update rule B), the count values from “257” to “4095” are compared based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The data is not output to the device 522. For example, when the counter value is updated to the final value “256” when the initial value is set to “0”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value of the counter 521. In this example, it is assumed that the initial value is changed to “50” by the CPU 56.

  While the count values from “0” to “255” are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 based on the update rule A, the comparator 522 receives the count value that is less than or equal to the random number maximum value “256”. Therefore, the input count value is output to the random value storage circuit 531 as it is. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation change circuit 523 reaches “256”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives an initial value (“0” in this example) of the count value from the CPU 56 when changing the initial value of the count value, and the random number maximum value (the main value) from the initial value “0”. In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “257”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 257, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to counter 521. In this example, since the CPU 56 changes the initial value to “50”, the counter 521 does not reset the count value even when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, and the changed initial value “50”. The count value is updated.

  While the counter 521 updates the count value from the changed initial value “50” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 sets the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In accordance with the update rule A, the count values from “50” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. Further, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 does not output the count values from “257” to “4095” to the comparator 522 based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. When the count value to be updated by the counter 521 makes one round (when updated 257 times), if the count value permutation change data is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 , Change the permutation of count values and output. For example, when the update rule is changed to the update rule B, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation from “256 → 255 →... 50” and outputs the result.

  While the count values from “256” to “50” are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value as it is to the random value storage circuit 531. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation change circuit 523 reaches “50”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives the initial count value (“50” in this example) from the CPU 56 when the initial count value is changed, and the random number maximum value (this In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “207”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 207, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to counter 521.

  Even when the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when the number of count values reaches 207. By doing so, even if the permutation of the count values is changed, the notification signal is counted based on the input of all the count values from the initial value “50” to the maximum value “256”. 521 can be output.

  When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the initial value of the count value and returns it to “0”. Then, the counter 521 updates the count value from “0”. When the value of the counter 521 is updated again from “0”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values from “49” to “0” to the comparator 522 based on the count value from the counter 521. The comparator 522 outputs the count value to the random value storage circuit 531 based on the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value (“49” in this example), the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the initial value of the count value of the counter 521 is changed again by the CPU 56.

  By repeating the operation as described above, the comparator 522 causes the counter 521 to continuously count up the count value from “0” to the random number maximum value “256”, and the value from “0” to “256”. Is stored in the random value storage circuit 531 as R1 (random number value). In other words, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the random number maximum value “256” or less, and causes the counter 521 to update the count value.

  Next, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a will be described. In the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “4095 (= 0FFFh)”. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured so that bits 0 to 11 can be written and read. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured such that bits 12 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 12 to 15 of the random number maximum value setting register 535, the values read from bits 12 to 15 are all "0 (= 0000b) ".

  The random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 has a predetermined lower limit value. When random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the initial value in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value setting data “0FFFh” specifying “4095” is reset. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “256” to “4095”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to the predetermined value “4095”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502.

  Next, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b will be described. In the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “65535 (= FFFFh)”. In the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured in a state in which all the bits 0 to 15 can be written and read.

  When random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” for designating a value smaller than the lower limit “256” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the random number maximum value setting register 535 in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value setting data “FFFFh” specifying the initial value “65535” is reset. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “256” to “65535”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “65535”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 includes a cycle setting register (RPS) 537 for storing cycle setting data for designating the cycle of the clock signal output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532 (that is, the count value update cycle). The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 based on the cycle setting data stored in the cycle setting register 537, and generates a random number circuit. A clock signal (random number generating clock signal SI1) used to generate a random number value is generated inside 503. By doing so, the clock signal output circuit 524 operates to output the random number generation clock signal SI1 for updating the count value C to the counter 521 on condition that the clock signal has been input a predetermined number of times. . The period setting data is data for setting how many times the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 is to be divided. The clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the generated random number generating clock signal SI1 to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532. For example, when the cycle setting data “0Fh (= 16)” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 by 16, and generates a random number. A clock signal SI1 is generated. In this case, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is “cycle of system clock signal × 128 × 16”.

  Next, an example of the period setting register 537 will be described. The cycle setting register 537 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “256 (= FFh)”. The cycle setting register 537 is configured in a state where both writing and reading are possible.

  In addition, a predetermined lower limit value is determined for the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537. When period setting data “00h to 06h” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” is written in the period setting register 537, the CPU 56 stores the lower limit value “ The cycle setting data “07h” specifying “cycle of system clock signal × 128 × 7” is reset. That is, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”, and the CPU 56 is set to a value smaller than the lower limit value. If it is determined that it is, reset the cycle setting data. The CPU 56 controls the period setting register 537 in which the period setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502.

  Note that the clock signal output circuit 524 may output the reference clock signal CLK to the counter 521 and the inverting circuit 532 without setting the period setting data in the period setting register 537. In this case, the CPU 56 does not need to perform processing for re-setting the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537 by comparing with the lower limit value. The counter 521 updates the count value C every time the reference clock signal CLK is input from the clock signal output circuit 524.

  The count value update signal output circuit 525 includes a count value update register (RGN) 538 that stores count value update data “01h”. The count value update data is data for requesting update of the count value. Count value update signal output circuit 525 outputs count value update signal SI3 to selector 528 in response to count value update data “01h” being written to count value update register 538.

  The count value update register 538 is an unreadable 8-bit register, and is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 1 to bit 7 of count value update register 538, it is invalidated.

  The random value read signal output circuit 526 includes a random value take-in register (RLT) 539 for storing random value take-in data “01h”. The random value acquisition data is data for requesting acquisition of the count value to the random value storage circuit 531. The random value read signal output circuit 526 latches a random value read signal for requesting reading of the random value in response to the random value fetch data “01h” being written in the random value fetch register 539. The data is output to the generation circuit 533.

  The random value fetch register 539 is an unreadable 8-bit register. The random value fetch register 539 is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. That is, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the random value fetch register 539, it is invalidated.

  The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 includes a random number update method selection register (RTS) 540 that stores random number update method selection data. The random number update method selection data is data for designating one of the random number update methods that is a method for updating the value of R1. The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 corresponds to the random number update method specified by the written random number update method selection data when the random number update method selection data is written in the random number update method selection register 540. The random number update method selection signal to be output is output to the selector 528 and the latch signal generation circuit 533.

  The random number update method selection register 540 is an 8-bit register, and an initial value is set to “00h”. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 1 can be written and read. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 2 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 2 to 7 of the random number update method selection register 540, the values read from bits 2 to 7 are all “0 (= 000000b)”.

  Next, an example of random number update method selection data written in the random number update method selection register 540 will be described. The random number update method selection data is composed of 2-bit data. The random number update method selection data “01b” is used to specify the first random number update method. The random number update method selection data “10b” is used to specify the second random number update method. In this embodiment, the first random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the count value update signal SI3 from the count value update signal output circuit 525. The second random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, when the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” is written in the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 is ready to be activated. On the other hand, when the random number update method selection data “00b” or “11b” is written to the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 cannot be activated.

  The selector 528 selects either the count value update signal SI 3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525 or the random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs the selected signal to the counter 521. When a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a first random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the first random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a count value update signal. The count value update signal SI3 output from the circuit 525 is selected and output to the counter 521. On the other hand, when a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a second random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the second random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a clock signal. The random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the circuit 524 is selected and output to the counter 521. When the first update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 receives a clock signal according to the count value update signal SI3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525. A numerical value update instruction signal for instructing update of numerical data synchronized with the random number generation clock signal SI1 output from the output circuit 524 may be output to the counter 521.

  The random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 includes a random number circuit activation register (RST) 541 that stores random number circuit activation data “80h”. The random circuit activation data is data for requesting activation of the random number circuit 503. When random number circuit activation data “80h” is written in the random number circuit activation register 541, the random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 outputs a predetermined random number circuit activation signal to the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524. The clock signal output circuit 524 is turned on. The random number circuit 503 is activated by starting the count value updating operation by the counter 521 and the internal clock signal output operation by the clock signal output circuit 524.

  The random number circuit activation register 541 is an 8-bit register, and an initial value is set to “00h”. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured such that only bit 7 can be written and read. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured in a state in which bits 0 to 6 cannot be written or read. In other words, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 0 to 6 of the random number circuit activation register 541, it is invalid, and all values read from bits 0 to 6 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  The random value storage circuit 531 is a 16-bit register, for example, and stores the value of R1 that is a random number used in the jackpot determination in the game control process. In response to the input of the latch signal SL from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random value storage circuit 531 stores the count value C output from the counter 521 via the comparator 522 as the value of R1. Each time the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random value storage circuit 531 reads the count value C updated by the counter 521 and stores the value of R1.

  The inverting circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 in which the polarity of the clock signal is inverted by inverting the signal level in the random number generating clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. Here, inverting the polarity of a signal means, for example, inverting a low level signal to a high level signal in a signal that can take two polarities such as a low level and a high level, or a high level signal. The signal polarity is changed to the opposite polarity, such as inverting the signal to a low level signal. Further, the inverting circuit 532 outputs the generated inverted clock signal SI2 to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  The latch signal generation circuit 533 is configured using a selector, a flip-flop circuit, and the like. The latch signal generation circuit 533 receives the random number read signal from the random number read signal output circuit 526 and the inverted clock signal SI2 from the inversion circuit 532, and stores the random value in the random value storage circuit 531. SL is output. The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL in accordance with the random value update method designated by the random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. In this case, when the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 selects the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532, and the latch signal It outputs to the random value storage circuit 531 as SL. On the other hand, when the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526. In synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the circuit 532, the latch signal SL is output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  The timer circuit 534 inputs a winning detection signal SS from the starting port switch 14a to the effect that the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port 14 has been detected. The timer circuit 534 measures the time during which the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a. Then, when the measurement time reaches a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms), the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value capture data “01h” into the random value capture register 539 of the random value read signal output circuit 526. For example, the timer circuit 534 is configured by an up counter or a down counter that is activated in response to the input of a high level signal. The timer circuit 534 receives the reference clock signal CLK sequentially input from the clock circuit 501 while the input from the start port switch 14a is at a high level (that is, while the winning detection signal SS is continuously input). Count up or down. Then, when the count value to be counted up or down reaches a value corresponding to 3 ms, the timer circuit 534 determines that the winning detection signal SS is input from the start port switch 14a, and receives the random number value capture data “01h”. Write to the random value fetch register 539.

  In the ROM 54 of the game control microcomputer 560, a storage area including a user program area and a user program management area is provided. The user program management area stores data (user program execution data) necessary for the CPU 56 to execute a user program 550 described later. In addition, in a predetermined area (address area 1F97h) in the user program management area, an initial value change selected by the user from among the initial value changing methods for changing the initial value input to the counter 521 is used. Initial value change method selection data for designating a method is stored.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial value changing method selection data. As shown in FIG. 9, the initial value changing method selection data is composed of 8-bit data. The initial value change method selection data “00h” is data specifying that the initial value is not changed as the initial value change method. In this embodiment, when the initial value change method selection data “00h” is set, the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value from a predetermined initial value “0” to a predetermined final value. It will be. The initial value change method selection data “01h” specifies that the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to a value based on the ID number for identifying the game control microcomputer 560 as the initial value change method. It is data to be. In this embodiment, when the initial value change method selection data “01h” is set, the initial value of the counter value updated by the counter 521 is changed from “0” to a value based on the ID number. The count value is updated from the changed initial value to a predetermined final value.

  The user program 550 stored in the user program area will be described. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the user program 550. As shown in FIG. 10, the user program 550 includes a random number circuit setting program 551 composed of a plurality of types of program modules, a display result determination program 552, a count value permutation change program 554, and a random value update program 555. Including.

  The random number circuit setting program 551 is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to execute a random number circuit setting process for performing an initial setting for updating the value of R1. That is, the CPU 56 functions as random number circuit setting means by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program 551.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the random number circuit setting program 551. As shown in FIG. 11, the random number circuit setting program 551 includes a random number maximum value setting module 551a, a random number update method selection module 551b, a cycle setting module 551c, and a random number circuit activation module 551d as a plurality of types of program modules. An initial value changing module 551e and a random number circuit selecting module 551f are included.

  The random number maximum value setting module 551a is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the maximum value of R1 preset by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number maximum value setting module 551a, thereby writing random number maximum value setting data for specifying the maximum value of R1 preset by the user into the random number maximum value setting register 535. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of R1 preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when “256” is set in advance as the maximum value of R1 by the user, the CPU 56 writes the random number maximum value setting data “0100h” in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and sets the maximum value “256” of R1. The random number circuit 503 is set.

  The random number update method selection module 551b is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the random number update method (first random number update method or second random number update method) selected by the user. The CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” for designating the random number update method selected by the user in the random number update method selection register 540 by executing processing according to the random number update method selection module 551b. Include. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the random number update method selected by the user in the random number circuit 503. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting either the first random number update method or the second random number update method as the random number update method used by the random number circuit 503 for the random number update.

  The cycle setting module 551c is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user (that is, the cycle in which the clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the clock signal to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532). It is a module. The CPU 56 executes processing according to the cycle setting module 551c to write cycle setting data for designating the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the cycle setting register 537. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when the period of the internal clock signal is set in advance by the user as “system clock signal period × 128 × 16”, the CPU 56 writes the period setting data “0Fh” in the period setting register 537 to Is set in the random number circuit 503. The cycle of the system clock signal × 128 × 16.

  The random number circuit activation module 551d is a program module for activating the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503 by writing the random number circuit activation data “80h” into the random number circuit activation register 541 by executing processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d.

  The initial value change module 551e is a program module for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521. The CPU 56 functions as an initial value changing unit by executing processing according to the initial value changing module 551e. The CPU 56 executes the initial value changing module 551e to change the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 by the initial value changing method selected by the user. By doing so, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting an initial value changing method.

  When initial value change method selection data “01h” is stored in the area of address 1F97h in the user program management area, the CPU 56 uses the unique ID assigned to each game control microcomputer 560 as the initial value of the count value. The value is calculated based on the number.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the calculated value “150” obtained by adding the predetermined value “50” to the ID number “100” is set in advance as the ID number. Are stored in association with each other. Further, for example, the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100” is stored in advance in association with the ID number. For example, only a predetermined value may be stored in advance in association with the ID number. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the value “150” obtained by adding the ID number (eg, “100” to the predetermined value (eg, “50”) stored in advance as the initial value of the count value. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a value “50” obtained by subtracting a predetermined value (for example, “50”) stored in advance from the ID number (for example, “100”) as the initial count value. It may be a value.

  When the initial value change method selection data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. By doing so, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved, and the initial value of the random number can be made difficult to recognize simply by looking at the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. . Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the transition condition to the big hit state from being illegally established by an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be improved.

  For example, when initial value change method selection data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, adds the predetermined value to the ID number). The initial value of the count value is changed to the calculated value obtained. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may calculate a value that is randomly changed using a random number as an ID number, thereby randomly updating a value used for the calculation and obtaining an initial value. By doing so, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number circuit selection module 551f is a program module for setting a random number circuit to be used when executing a timer interrupt process including a game control process from among the random number circuits 503 built in the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number circuit selection module 551f, so that any one of the two random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is selected. Is used when timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, the CPU 56 uses a 12-bit random number circuit 503a or 16 as a random number circuit used when executing a timer interrupt process according to a predetermined set value (a value set in advance by the user) stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55. The bit random number circuit 503b is set.

  Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer may perform a jackpot determination based on a random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and may perform a probability change determination based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. . The random value storage circuit 531 exists in each of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b (that is, a random number storage circuit that stores a random number for 12 bits and a random number storage circuit that stores a random number for 16 bits) And exist separately). When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs the random number read from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the random number read from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. , And stored in separate buffer areas provided in the RAM 55. Therefore, even when the timing for reading the random number from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the timing for reading the random number from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same, two different random numbers can be extracted and stored in different buffer areas. it can.

  The random value update program 555 is a program for updating the value of R1 stored in the random value storage circuit 531 when the first random number update method is selected as the random number update method. The CPU 56 functions as a random value updating means by executing processing according to the random value updating program 555. The CPU 56 counts the counter 521 by executing the random value update program 555 and writing the count value update data “01h” into the count value update register 538 when the first random number update method is selected. The value is updated, and the value of R1 stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. When the second random number update method is selected as the random number update method, the counter 521 is updated with the random number generation clock signal output from the clock signal output circuit 524, and the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. The value of R1 stored in is updated.

  The display result determination program 552 is a program for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol display 8.

  The CPU 56 reads the value of R1 from the random value storage circuit 531 and stores it in the RAM 55 when the starting condition for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 15 and the special symbol variation display is established. Then, the CPU 56 reads out the stored R1 in response to the establishment of a start condition (also referred to as an execution condition) for starting (executing) a special symbol variation display as described later, and determines the display result. By executing the processing in accordance with the program 552, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol display 8 based on R1.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the value of R1 or reads the value of R1 when the first random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 12, when the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the count value update data “01h” into the count value update register 538 so that the random value storage circuit 531 stores it. The value of R1 (for example, “2”) is updated. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of R1 (for example, “2”) from the random value storage circuit 531 in response to the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 15 and the special symbol starting condition is satisfied.

  When the value of R1 stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is further updated, when an interval equal to or longer than the period of the system clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 has elapsed since the value of R1 was updated at the previous update. The count value update data “01h” must be written in the count value update register 538. This is because it is necessary to secure time for reading the updated value of R1 from the random value storage circuit 531.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the value of R1 or reads the value of R1 when the second random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 13, when the second random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the random number value take-in command “01h” into the random value take-in register 539, thereby outputting the count output from the counter 521. A value (for example, “2”) is taken into the random value storage circuit 531, and the value of R1 stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Then, CPU 56 reads the updated value of R1 (for example, “2”) from random value storage circuit 531.

  Specifically, when the second random number update method is selected, the counter 521 updates the count value C using the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 as a trigger. Thereafter, when the random value take-in command “01h” is written into the random value take-in register 539, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL to the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the random value storage circuit 531 reads and stores the count value output from the counter 521 when the latch signal SL is input. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of R1 stored in the random value storage circuit 531.

  If the CPU 56 does not write the random value acquisition command “01h” to the random value acquisition register 539, the random value storage circuit 531 will update the random value updated by the counter 521 even if the counter 521 updates the count value. Is not read. For example, the CPU 56 writes a random value take-in command “01h” into the random value take-in register 539, causes the count value “3” output from the counter 521 to be taken into the random value store circuit 531, and the random value store circuit 531 It is assumed that the stored R1 value “3” is updated. In this case, unless the CPU 56 writes the random value fetch command “01h” again in the random value fetch register 539, the count value output from the counter 521 is updated from “3” to “4” or “5”. However, the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is not updated, and the random value read from the random value storage circuit 531 remains “3”.

  The count value permutation change program 554 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” to the count value permutation change register 536, and executes count value permutation change processing for changing the permutation of the count values stored in the random value storage circuit 531. It is a program to do. The CPU 56 functions as numerical data permutation changing means by executing processing according to the count value permutation changing program 554. The CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change program 554 and writes the count value permutation change data “01h” into the count value permutation change register 536, so that the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs the random number value storage circuit 531. Change the permutation of input count values.

  Next, a random counter as numerical value updating means for updating numerical data using software in order to generate random numbers used for control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a random counter used by the game control microcomputer 560 to generate random numbers used for game control. FIG. 14 shows random counters R2 to R8 as an example of the random counter.

  As described above, whether or not to make a big hit (hit determination) is performed using R1 that is a random value generated by the random number circuit 503 that is a hardware circuit. The random value used is generated using a numerical value updated by software executed by the game control microcomputer 560.

  When R2 is determined in advance to generate a big hit based on the big hit determination using R1, the 15R normal big hit, the 15R positive variation big hit A, the 15R positive variable big hit B, the 2R positive variable big hit A, and the 2R positive variable big hit B It is a numerical data updating means (random counter) for generating random numbers used for determining which type of jackpot game state to be used and determining the jackpot symbol. R2 is configured to count up from “0” to “99” which is the upper limit thereof, and to count up again from “0”. This R2 is added and updated by 1 every 2 msec.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the big hit gaming state is set, it is controlled to be either a probable big hit that is later controlled to be probable, or a normal big hit that is not controlled to be probable later (also referred to as non-probable big hit). . In the following description, the term “big hit” is a case where both the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit are representatively shown. As described above, the jackpot controlled to the probability change state includes the 15R probability change jackpot that is controlled to the probability change state through the jackpot gaming state in which the upper limit of the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state is set to the usual 15 rounds, and the jackpot The upper limit of the number of rounds in the game state is set to a lower number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) than usual, and the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 20 in one round is set to a shorter time (1 second) than usual. 2R probability variation big hit that is controlled to the probability variation state via the jackpot gaming state.

  As the 15R probability variation jackpot, a plurality of 15R probability variation jackpots of 15R probability variation jackpot A and 15R probability variation jackpot B are provided. In the 15R probability variation big hit A and the 15R probability variation big hit B, the transition destinations when the game control state and the control mode of the effect control are changed after the big hit gaming state is partially different. In the following description, “15R probability variation jackpot” is simply a case where both 15R probability variation jackpot A and 15R probability variation jackpot B are represented. As the 2R probability variation jackpot, a plurality of 2R probability variation jackpots A and 2R probability variation jackpots B are provided. In the 2R probability variation big hit A and the 2R probability variation big hit B, the transition destination when the game control state and the control mode of the effect control shift after the end of the big hit gaming state is partially different. In the following description, “2R probability variation big hit” is simply a case where both 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B are representatively shown. The term “probability big hit” is simply a case where both 15R probability big hit and 2R probability big hit are representatively shown. In addition, when simply indicating “hit”, both big hits and small hits are representatively shown.

  Next, the state of game control specified by the jackpot probability and the base, and the control mode of effect control (hereinafter also referred to as effect control mode) will be described. The state of the game control is based on a jackpot probability and a base level (such a jackpot probability and base state is called a probability / base state), a low probability base, a high probability base, a high accuracy base, and It is classified into a plurality of game control states based on low probability. In addition, the control mode of effect control includes a plurality of control modes such as a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a first mission mode, a second mission mode, and a high-accuracy notification mode.

  The low probability low base is a state of game control in a non-probability change state (low probability state) and a non-time-short state (low base state). The high probability low base is a state of game control in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-time-short state (low base state). The high-accuracy base is a state of game control in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state). The low probability high base is a state of game control in a non-probability changing state (low probability state) and a short time state (high base state).

  Whether the probability variation state (high probability state) or the non-probability variation state (low probability state) is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag, which is a flag set in the probability variation state, is set. . Whether the time-short state (high base state) or the non-time-short state (low base state) is determined is determined based on whether or not the time-short flag, which is a flag set in the time-short state, is set. Is done.

  In each state of the low accuracy low base, the high accuracy low base, the high accuracy high base, and the low accuracy high base, the effect control is performed in the corresponding effect control modes as follows.

  The normal mode is an effect control mode for a low probability low base. In the normal mode, the variable display device 9 performs variable display with a non-short-time variable pattern. The probability change mode is an effect control mode when the base is highly accurate and high. In the probability variation mode, the variation display device 9 indicates that the probability variation state is present, and the variation display is performed with a variation pattern for time reduction. The time reduction mode is an effect control mode for a low-accuracy base. In the time reduction mode, the variable display device 9 indicates that the time is short, and the variable display is performed with a time reduction variation pattern.

  The first mission mode is an effect control mode when the base is high and low, and is a mode for performing a predetermined true mission effect as described later. The second mission mode is an effect control mode in the low-probability low-base state, and is a mode for performing a predetermined false (commonly called “gasse”) mission effect as described later. In the first mission mode and the second mission mode, the effects displayed on the variation display device 9 are similar to each other, and a variation pattern for non-short-time operation is used in both modes. Therefore, the mission effect displayed on the variable display device 9 is set so that the player cannot easily determine which mode is controlled between the first mission mode and the second mission mode.

  Here, the mission effect will be described. The mission effect is an effect indicating whether or not the mission can be succeeded (achieved) while notifying the player of the achievement condition of the certain mission (task) at the time of the variable display. When the achievement condition is satisfied and the mission is achieved, the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player, for example, 15R big hit. The mission presented by being notified in this mission effect is, for example, within a predetermined period (30 fluctuations) such that a predetermined character is put out while 30 special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed. This is an effect pattern that indicates the type of effect that can be executed (within a period during which the display is performed). When the jackpot display result of 15R jackpot is derived and displayed in the variable display within the mission effect period, an effect that the mission is successful (for example, a variable display with an effect pattern in which a predetermined character appears) is performed. It should be noted that the predetermined period specified as the mission period presented in the mission effect mission may be a period in which the number of variable displays is specified, such as a period in which 30 variable displays are performed, for example, 5 minutes. It may be a period that specifies an elapsed time, such as a period within.

  Further, when the jackpot display result of 15R jackpot is not derived and displayed in the variable display within the mission effect period, an effect in which the mission fails in the last variable display within the mission effect period is performed. Note that, within the mission effect period, in the variable display until the mission is successful, for example, the display result is derived and displayed as a display result without a predetermined character appearing. The period during which such mission effects are performed continues until the above-described predetermined period ends, and ends when the mission is successful even before the above-described predetermined period ends. There are a plurality of such mission effects, which are selectively executed.

  Since the first mission effect, which is a true mission effect, is performed when the base is highly accurate and low, which is one of the advantageous states for the player, it increases the player's expectation for the big hit (15R big hit). . On the other hand, the second mission effect, which is a fake mission effect, is as if the game control is performed by performing the same effect as the true mission effect, even though the actual game control state is a low probability low base. The player feels that the state is in a highly accurate and low base state. If such a false mission effect is performed, the frequency of increasing the player's expectation can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The high-accuracy notification mode is an effect control mode when the base is high and low, and is a mode that shifts from the first mission mode when the mission period is completed in the first mission mode and the mission period ends. As described above, in the variable display device 9, an effect is performed in an effect mode different from that in the probability variation mode, thereby informing that the state is a high probability state.

  In the variable display device 9, in order to indicate whether the control mode of the effect control is controlled to a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a first mission mode, a second mission mode, or the like. In addition, corresponding to these modes, different background images are displayed for each mode. Here, the background image refers to an image that is the background of a decorative pattern.

  When a valid start winning is detected by the start port switch 62, each of R1 and R2 described above and R8 for small hit determination to be described later is extracted and stored in the RAM 55 as reserved storage data. . For R1, whether or not the extracted value of R1 stored in the RAM 55 matches the predetermined jackpot determination value at the stage before the special symbol display on the special symbol display 8 is started. Is judged. In this determination, if they match, it is determined to generate a big hit using the display result of the variable display as the big hit display result, and the above-described big hit gaming state control is performed. If they do not coincide with each other, it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not a big hit (becomes a small hit display result or an outlier display result), and the gaming state does not change. In a normal probability state other than the probability variation state, the jackpot determination value is set to one numerical value, for example. In the probability variation state, the big hit judgment value is set to a plurality of numerical values (in this case, the big hit judgment value is set so that the numerical order does not become an adjacent numerical value in order to prevent the big hit judgment from being biased). As a result, the probability of a big hit is improved as compared with the case of the non-probable change state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the value of R2 is allocated and associated with the type of jackpot gaming state and the type of jackpot symbol of the special symbol. The extracted value of R2 is read at a predetermined timing before starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, and it is determined whether it matches any of a plurality of predetermined jackpot type / symbol determination values. The jackpot type corresponding to the extracted value of R2 is selected and determined as the jackpot generated as a result of the variable display, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the extracted value of R2 is derived and displayed as a display result in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Selection is decided.

  R3 is determined not to generate a big hit by the big hit determination using R1, and is determined not to generate a small hit by the small hit determination using R8, which will be described later. This is numerical data updating means (random counter) for generating random numbers used to randomly determine which type of outlier symbols are to be displayed on the special symbol display 8. . R3 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit of “3”, and then count up again from “0”, adding 1 every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Updated. The value of R3 is assigned and associated with each of the special symbols. R3 is extracted at a predetermined timing before starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and the special symbol corresponding to the value of R3 selected by lottery is determined as the off symbol.

  Here, the count-up operation in the remaining interrupt processing time performed in a predetermined random counter such as R3 will be described. The CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 performs various controls by periodically executing interrupt processing. For a certain interrupt processing, after the interrupt processing is executed, the period until the start of the next execution of the interrupt processing is Waiting for interrupt processing. Repeating the random counter addition update process using an infinite loop during the interrupt process surplus time waiting for such interrupt process is called counting up the interrupt process surplus time.

  R4 is numerical data updating means (random counter) for generating random numbers used to randomly determine a variation pattern which is a variation display pattern of the special symbol display 8 and the variation display device 9. R4 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “99”, and then count up again from “0”, and once every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Added and updated. Based on the value of the counter extracted from R4 at a predetermined timing such as at the start of special symbol variation, based on the relationship between the predetermined count value and the variation pattern, from among a plurality of predetermined variation patterns The variation pattern used for variation display is selected and determined. Each fluctuation pattern has a predetermined fluctuation display time (the time from the start of fluctuation display until the display result is derived and displayed, also called the fluctuation time). The variable display time is selected and determined.

  R5 is determined when the variable display device 9 is determined not to generate a big hit by the big hit determination using R1 and is determined not to generate the small hit by the small hit determination using R8 described later. That is, when it is determined to be out of place, whether the reach display mode described above is formed during the variable display (hereinafter referred to as “reach out”) or the reach display mode is not formed (hereinafter referred to as non-reach out). It is a numerical data updating means (random counter) for reach determination for generating a random number used for determining at random. R5 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “39”, and then count up again from “0”, and add 1 every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Updated. At the stage before determining the variation pattern, the value of R5 is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the extracted value of R5 matches a predetermined reach determination value. If these values match, it is determined that the reach is out of control, and the reach state is controlled during the variable display where the display result is out of control. On the other hand, if these values do not match, it is determined that the non-reach is out of control, and control is performed not to reach the reach state during the variable display where the display result is out of place.

  R6 is a numerical data update means (random counter) for generating random numbers used to randomly determine in advance whether or not to generate a hit for the variable display of the normal symbol display 10. R6 is configured to count up from an initial value such as “0”, count up to its upper limit “11”, and then count up again from the initial value such as “0”, and every 2 msec. One is added and updated. When a valid start passage is detected by the gate switch 32a, the R6 random number is extracted and stored in the RAM 55 as passage storage data. Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted value coincides with a predetermined hit determination value at a stage before starting the normal symbol variation display, and if it matches, the normal symbol hit may be generated. The above-described control is performed, and in the case of a mismatch, it is determined to be off and the above-described control is not performed.

  R7 is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the above-described secondary re-lottery display when it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit A or 15R probability variation big hit B is determined by determining the big hit type. Numerical data updating means (random counter) for generating. R7 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit of “49”, and then count up again from “0”, adding 1 every 2 msec and interrupt processing surplus time. Updated. R7 is extracted at a predetermined timing before the special symbol variation display is started, and it is determined whether or not it coincides with a predetermined determination value for secondary re-lottery.

  As for the value of R7, when the extracted value of R7 matches any of the predetermined secondary re-lottery display determination values, it is determined to display the secondary re-lottery display. On the other hand, when the extracted value of R7 does not match any secondary re-lottery determination value, it is determined not to execute the secondary re-lottery display.

  R8 is a small hit determination for generating a random number used to randomly determine whether or not to make a small hit when the variable display device 9 is determined not to be a big hit in the aforementioned big hit determination. Numerical data updating means (random counter). Here, the small hit will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where the small hit is controlled when the big hit gaming state is not achieved. As described above, the small hit is a hit state different from the big hit, and a predetermined small hit display result is displayed in the variable display result, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is displayed in the same manner as the 2R probability variable big hit. It is per opening and closing twice. Since the small hit is different from the big hit, it is not related to the probability of game control and the change in the base state.

  R8 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “19” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 2 msec. As described above, the value of R8 extracted at the time of starting winning is read at a predetermined timing before the start of variable display, and it is determined whether or not the extracted value of R8 matches a predetermined small hit determination value. Is done. When these values match, control for generating a small hit gaming state is performed.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining an example of various random counters used by the effect control microcomputer 800 for effect control. FIG. 15 shows, as an example of a random counter, a random counter RT for determining the content of effects and random counters RU-1 to RU-3 for determining decorative symbols to be stopped.

  RT is a numerical data update means (random counter) for effect content determination for generating random numbers used to randomly determine the content of various effects such as mission effects performed in the variable display device 9. RT is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “232” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 33 msec. Based on the relationship between the predetermined counter value and the content of the effect, the content of the effect is selected and determined from the content of the effect determined based on the counter value extracted from the RT at a predetermined timing. For example, a plurality of types of mission effects are provided for the mission effects performed by the variable display device 9, and the corresponding RT values are assigned to the respective mission effects. When starting the mission effect, the mission effect corresponding to the counter value extracted from the RT at a predetermined timing is selected and executed.

  RU-1 to RU-3 are numerical value updating means for determining decorative symbol stop symbols (random) for generating random numbers used to randomly determine decorative symbols for the variable display device 9 in advance. Counter). RU-1 is used to determine the stop symbol of the left symbol. RU-2 is used to determine the stop symbol of the middle symbol. RU-3 is used to determine the stop symbol of the right symbol. For each of RU-1 to RU-3, RU-1 is updated every 33 msec, RU-2 is updated every carry of RU-1, and RU-3 is added and updated every carry of RU-2. After being updated and updated to 9 which is the upper limit, it is updated again from 0.

  The decorative symbols are changed (updated) and displayed in accordance with a predetermined symbol arrangement order. Each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is associated with numerical data for determining decorative symbol stop symbols, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the jackpot determination (determination by R1) will not be a big hit, In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is determined not to be a small hit in the small hit determination (determination by R8), and it is determined not to reach the reach state by the reach determination, The symbols corresponding to the random numbers extracted from each of RU-1 to RU-3 at a predetermined timing are determined as stop symbols that result in the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. If the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the correction is made so that the symbol becomes a loss symbol (for example, one symbol for the middle symbol). Each stop symbol is determined by correction). Further, when it is determined that the reach state is reached by the reach determination, the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from RU-1 among the random numbers extracted at the above-described timing is reached. The symbols for the left and right decorative symbols forming the state are determined as stop symbols, and the symbol corresponding to the numerical data matching the counter value extracted from RU-2 is determined as the stop symbol for the middle symbol. Also in this case, when the combination of the big hit symbol is accidentally made, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the symbol so that it becomes an off symbol (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  Further, when it is determined that the big hit is determined by the big hit determination by the game control microcomputer 560, and it is determined that the 15R normal big hit is determined by the big hit type / design determination (determination by R2), a predetermined The jackpot symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from RU-3 at the timing of (except for “7” used as the probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined as the stop symbol that results in the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. Is done. As a result, the 15R normal jackpot display result based on the decorative design is a doublet other than “7”.

  Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit, and when it is determined that the jackpot type / symbol is determined to be a 2R probability variable big hit, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols called chance eyes is obtained. It is determined as a stop symbol that will be the variable display result for each of the left, middle and right decorative symbols. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is made in the small hit determination, the same chance chance as in the case of 2R probability variable big hit is determined as a stop symbol that becomes a variation display result of each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols.

  In addition, as will be described later, RU-1 to RU-3 are temporary display symbols in the primary re-lottery display, a variable display result displayed before the big hit gaming state when the secondary re-lottery display is performed, and It is also used to determine each stop symbol as a variable display result in the first re-lottery display.

  Next, the characteristics of each of the various hits including the big hits and the small hits will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing in a tabular form the characteristics of each hit including various big hits and small hits.

  When the extracted value of R2 is any one of “0” to “59”, it is determined that the 15R normal jackpot is set and that the special symbol jackpot is set to “1” as the 15R normal jackpot display result. . When the 15R normal jackpot is reached, the decorative symbol display result on the variable display device 9 is “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, It is a doublet of any one of “6”, “8”, and “9”. Further, in the 15R normal jackpot, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the probability of jackpot occurrence later becomes a low probability.

  When the extracted value of R2 is any one of “60” to “69”, it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit A is set and that the special symbol big hit symbol is “3” as the 15R probability variation big hit A display result. Is done. When the 15R probability variable big hit A is reached, the display result of the decorative pattern on the variable display device 9 is a “7” double-eyed as the 15R probability variable big hit display result. The 15R probability variation jackpot A has a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the probability of jackpot occurrence later becomes high.

  When the extracted value of R2 is any one of “70” to “79”, it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit B is set, and the special symbol big hit symbol is “5” as the 15R probability variation big hit B display result. Is done. When the 15R probability variation big hit B is reached, the display result of the decorative pattern on the variable display device 9 is the same as that of the 15R probability variation big hit A, with a “7” as the 15R probability variation big hit display result. In addition, the 15R probability variation jackpot B has a maximum number of rounds of 15 and the probability of jackpot occurrence later becomes high.

  When the extracted value of R2 is any of “80” to “89”, it is determined that 2R probability variation big hit A is set, and that the special symbol big hit symbol is “7” as the 2R probability variation big hit A display result. Is done. When the 2R probability variable big hit A is reached, the display result of the decorative pattern on the variable display device 9 is the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variable big hit display result. Here, the chance is a combination of symbols such as the 15R probability variation jackpot display result described above, which is configured by a combination of symbols other than the double eye, and is predetermined as a display result that gives the player a chance. The 2R probability variable jackpot A has a maximum round count of 2 rounds, and the jackpot occurrence probability will be high later.

  When the extracted value of R2 is any of “90” to “99”, it is determined that 2R probability variation big hit B is set, and that the special symbol big hit symbol is “9” as the 2R probability variation big hit B display result. Is done. When the 2R probability variable big hit B is reached, the display result of the decorative pattern on the variable display device 9 becomes the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variable big hit display result as in the case of the 2R probability variable big hit A. In the 2R probability variable big hit B, the maximum number of rounds is two rounds, and the big hit occurrence probability is high. Data indicating the relationship between the value of R2 and the determined type of jackpot gaming state and the type of jackpot symbol is stored in the ROM 54.

  When the extracted value of R8 is “5”, it is determined to match with the small hit determination value, so that the small hit is made, and the special big hit symbol is set to “0” as the small hit display result. The When it is a small hit, the decorative symbol display result (small hit display result) on the variable display device 9 is the chance of “135” as in the case of 2R probability variable big hit. For small hits, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 opens twice, but the probability of occurrence of big hits does not change. Data indicating the relationship between the R8 value and the small hit determination value is stored in the ROM 54.

  Next, how the game control state (probability / base state) and the effect control mode shift will be described. The game control state (probability / base state) is managed by the game control microcomputer 560, and is shifted or maintained based on the conditions shown in FIGS. The effect control mode is managed by the effect control microcomputer 800, and is shifted or maintained based on the conditions as shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is a table showing the relationship between the game control state (probability / base state) when a hit occurs, the type of win, and the game control state after hit. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the hit type and state change for the game control state (probability / base state), and the relationship between the hit and state change for the effect control mode.

  Referring to FIGS. 17 and 18, (1) in the table indicates a low accuracy low base, (2) indicates a high accuracy low base, (3) indicates a high accuracy high base, and (4) indicates a low accuracy high base. Number. Further, in each of FIGS. 17 and 18, the probability that a is selected as a big hit is a 15R normal big hit with a probability of 60%, and b is a probability that is selected when a big hit is determined. 10% 15R probability variation big hit A, c is a probability of being selected when it is determined to be a big hit 10% 15R probability variation big hit B, d is a probability of being selected when it is determined to be a big hit 10% The 2R probability variation big hit A, e is a symbol indicating the 2R probability variation big hit B, f with a 10% probability of selection when it is determined to be a big hit. In FIG. 18, the arrows indicate the flow of transition or maintenance of the game control state and the effect control mode, and the symbols a to f shown adjacent to the arrows correspond to the symbols indicating the type of jackpot described above. ing.

  Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. First, the low probability low base state will be described. In the low probability low base, the effect control mode is one of the normal mode and the second mission mode. When either of 15R normal big hit or small hit occurs in the low probability low base state, the low probability low base is maintained. When the 15R normal big hit occurs in the low probability low base state, the effect control mode becomes the normal mode. When a small hit occurs in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the second mission mode. When the mission period cannot be achieved in the second mission mode and the mission period ends, the mode shifts from the second mission mode to the normal mode. Further, when any of 15R probability variation big hit A, 15R probability variation big hit B, and 2R probability variation big hit B occurs in the low probability low base state, the game control state shifts to the high probability low base.

  Further, when the 2R probability variable big hit A occurs in the low probability low base state, the game control state shifts to the high probability high base. Thus, in the low probability low base state, it is common that the 2R probability variation big hit A and the 2R probability variation big hit B become high probability states, but the transition destination of the probability / base state is different.

  Next, the state of high accuracy and low base will be described. On the high accuracy low base, the production control mode is one of the first mission mode and the high accuracy notification mode. The first mission mode is entered when the low-accuracy low base state is shifted to the high-accuracy low-base state, and when the high-accuracy low-base state is maintained due to the occurrence of the 15R probability variation big hit B or small hit. The effect control mode when shifting from the low probability low base state to the high probability low base state may be a transition from the normal mode to the first mission mode, or a transition from the second mission mode to the first mission mode. . When shifting from the second mission mode to the first mission mode, the probability / base state changes, but since the same mission effect is performed, the display effect on the variable display device 9 does not change. Then, when the mission period is ended without being able to achieve the mission in the first mission mode, the first mission mode is maintained as it is due to the additional mission, or the high-accuracy notification mode is shifted to. On the other hand, if any of 15R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit A, and 2R probability variation big hit B occurs in the high probability low base state, the game control state shifts to the high probability high base. Further, when a 15R normal big hit occurs in the highly accurate low base state, the base shifts to the low accurate high base.

  Next, the state of the highly accurate base will be described. In the high-accuracy base, the effect control mode is a probability variation mode. In the high-accuracy base state, if any of 15R probability variation big hit A, 15R probability variation big hit B, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, or small hit occurs, the game control state maintains the high probability high base. To do. Further, when a 15R normal big hit occurs in the high accuracy and high base state, the base shifts to the low accuracy and high accuracy base.

  Also, the low-accuracy base state will be described. On the low-accuracy base, the effect control mode is a time reduction mode. When the 15R normal big hit occurs in the low-accuracy high-base state, the base shifts to the low-accuracy low-base. In that case, the effect control mode is the normal mode. When one of 15R probability variation big hit A, 15R probability variation big hit B, 2R probability variation big hit A, and 2R probability variation big hit B occurs in the low probability high base state, the game control state maintains the low probability high base. Further, when a small hit occurs in the low accuracy base state, the low accuracy base is maintained.

  As described above, the game control state and the effect control mode are shifted or maintained based on the establishment of a predetermined condition such as the occurrence of a win shown in FIG. Thus, even when the same type of jackpot occurs, the probability / base state after the jackpot gaming state may differ depending on the probability / base state at the time of occurrence. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  For 2R probability variation big hits, there are multiple types of probability variation big hits, 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B, but the current probability / base state will be no matter which probability variation big hit occurs. It is controlled so as not to be disadvantageous for the player. As a result, the player's sense of expectation does not decrease due to the occurrence of the 2R probability variation big hit.

  Also, as the probability / base state, the low base state (low accuracy low base, high accuracy low base) and high base state (low accuracy high base, high accuracy low base) differing in the ease of entering the start winning opening 14 ), The player can realize whether the gaming state is advantageous or unfavorable in the game until the big hit state occurs.

  In the fluctuation display section (special symbol display 8, fluctuation display device 9), the selection of whether or not the fluctuation pattern and the primary re-lottery display are present is determined by the data table for fluctuation pattern selection and the extracted value of R4 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is performed using. The variation pattern selection data table includes a shortened variation pattern data table used to select and determine a shortened variation pattern used in the high accuracy base state and the low accuracy high base state, a low accuracy low base state, and a high accuracy base state. And a non-shortening variation pattern data table used for selecting and determining a non-shortening variation pattern used in the certain low base state, and stored in advance in the ROM 54 described above.

  The non-shortening variation pattern data table includes a low accuracy low base time data table used at the time of low accuracy low base and a high accuracy low base time data table used at the time of high accuracy low base. The shortening variation pattern data table includes a low-accuracy base data table used during low-accuracy base and a high-accuracy base data table used during high-accuracy base. As such a data table, a table corresponding to the jackpot probability and the base state when the variation pattern is determined is selected and used.

  19 and 20 are diagrams for explaining the non-shortening variation pattern table in a table format. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating the low-accuracy low-base data table in a table format. In the low probability low base time data table of the non-shortening variation pattern table, the result of the big hit determination using R1, the result of the big hit type determination using R2, the result of the reach determination using R5, and R8 Based on the results of the small hit determination used, the data table at the time of non-reach deviation determination, the data table at the time of reach deviation determination, the data table at the time of 15R normal big hit determination, the data table at the time of 15R probability variable big hit A / 15R probability variable big hit B, 2R probability big hit A data table for determining A, 2R probability variation big hit B / small hit determining data table are used properly.

  In the low probability low base state, the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit, the small hit determination result using R8 is not a small hit, and the reach determination result using R5 does not generate reach. When it is at the time of non-reach shift determination, a non-reach shift determination data table is used in which the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined as the variation pattern used for variation display is defined as follows. . In the information of the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern data table, it is possible to specify the type of hit-off type (two types of hits, 15R big hit and other hits can be specified. 3 types of misses and missed chances can be identified), information that can identify the type of variation pattern (also information that can identify the variation display time), information that can identify the presence or absence of the first re-lottery, Information that can specify the effect control mode after the variable display (including the case where the effect control mode shifts and the case where the effect control mode continues without shifting) is included.

  When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 94”, a variation pattern of “displacement A variation pattern no primary re-lottery / after normal mode” having a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. Here, “missing” is information indicating that it is a non-hit and non-hit, non-reach, and non-chance miss. The “A variation pattern” is information indicating an effect display pattern called “A” among the effect display patterns in the variable display. “No primary re-lottery” is information indicating that the primary re-lottery display is not performed. Further, the “rear normal mode” is information indicating that the normal mode is set after the fluctuation display (after the big hit when the big hit is reached). As described above, the variation pattern of “outside A variation pattern no primary re-lottery / after normal mode” indicates that the variation display result is out of place, the effect display pattern is the A variation pattern, and the primary re-lottery display is This indicates that no operation is performed and that the normal mode is set after the change display.

  When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “95 to 99”, “no chance chance C variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. The “missing chance chance” is information indicating that the chance eyes are displayed as a variation display result other than the big hit and the small hit and are out of place. The “C variation pattern” is information indicating an effect display pattern called “C” among the effect display patterns in the variable display. The “rear mission mode” is information indicating that the mission mode (in this case, the second mission mode) is set after the fluctuation display (after the big hit when the big hit is reached). When the chance chance deviation C variation pattern primary re-lottery is not selected and the post mission mode is selected, the variation display device 9 uses the above-mentioned chance items ("135") used as the 2R probability variation big hit display result and the small hit display result. A different predetermined chance for losing (for example, “579”) is derived and displayed as a display result, and the mode shifts to the mission mode.

  Further, in the low probability and low base state, the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit, the small hit determination result using R8 is not a small hit, and the reach determination result using R5 is reach. The reach deviation determination time data table in which the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is determined as follows is used. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 49”, “no reach A variation pattern primary re-lottery / after normal mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. Here, “reach” is information indicating outlier reach. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no reach B variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-normal mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. Here, the “B variation pattern” is information indicating an effect display pattern called “B” among the effect display patterns in the variable display.

  Also, in the low probability low base state, when the big hit judgment result using R1 is a big hit and the big hit is 15R normal big hit according to the decision result of the big hit type using R2, 15R normal big hit decision A time data table is used. In the 15R normal big hit determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, “15R big hit A variation pattern primary re-lottery / after normal mode” with variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. Here, “15R big hit” is information representative of 15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit A, and 15R probability big hit B. “With primary re-lottery” is information indicating that primary re-lottery display is performed. It shows a variation pattern in which a variation display result is derived and displayed after the first re-lottery. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “15 to 29”, “no 15R big hit A variation pattern primary re-lottery” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  For the fluctuation pattern with the primary re-lottery, the time during which the primary re-lottery display is performed is included in the fluctuation display time. For example, “15R big hit A variation pattern with primary re-lottery” and “15R big hit A variation pattern without primary re-lottery” are displayed as decorative display of the variation pattern of the common A variation pattern. However, “15R big hit A fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery” means that the primary re-lottery display is displayed for 5 seconds after the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the A fluctuation pattern. Compared to “no re-lottery”, the fluctuation display time is set to be longer by 5 seconds. Such a relationship is the same for other variation patterns. In the variation pattern shown in this embodiment, the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display are managed separately for the variation mode and the variation display time. The variable display time required for the lottery display is not included.

  When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / after normal mode” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “63 to 99”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary no re-lottery / after normal mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, in the state of low probability and low base, the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is 15R probability variation big hit A or 15R probability variation big hit B depending on the decision result of the big hit type using R2. In some cases, a data table for determining 15R probability variation big hit A and 15R probability variation big hit B is used. In the data table at the time of determining 15R probability variation big hit A and 15R probability variation big hit B, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern to be selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, “15R big hit A variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. The “rear mission mode” in the data table at the time of determination of 15R probability variation big hit A and 15R probability variation big hit B is information indicating the first mission mode. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “15 to 29”, “15R big hit A variation pattern primary no re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “63 to 99”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary no re-lottery / post mission mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Also, in the low probability low base state, when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is a 2R positive variation big hit A based on the determination result of the big hit type using R2, the 2R positive variation big hit A data table when A is determined is used. In the 2R probability variation big hit A determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 49”, “no chance C variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. Here, “chance hits” is information representative of 2R probability variation big hits A, 2R probability variation big hits B, and small hits that are hit when the variation display result is a chance chance. The “post-probability variation mode” in the 2R probability variation big hit A determination data table is information indicating that the probability variation mode is set after the fluctuation display (after the big hit when the big hit is made). When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “50 to 99”, “no chance change D variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, in the state of low probability and low base, when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit and the big hit is 2R probability variable big hit B based on the determination result of the big hit type using R2, or R1 When the big hit determination result using せ is not a big hit and the small hit determination result using R8 is a small hit, the 2R probability variable big hit B / small hit determination data table is used. In the 2R probability variable big hit B / small hit determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “no chance C variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. The “post mission mode” in this case is information representative of the first mission mode and the second mission mode that become the mission mode after the change display. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no chance D variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a high accuracy low base time data table in a table format. In the high accuracy low base data table of the non-shortening variation pattern table, the result of the big hit determination using R1, the result of the big hit type determination using R2, the result of the reach determination using R5, and R8 Based on the results of the small hit determination used, the non-reach deviation determination data table, the reach deviation determination data table, the 15R normal big hit determination data table, the 15R positive variable big hit A determination data table, and the 15R positive variable big hit B determination data table. A data table for determining 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B and a data table for determining small hit big are properly used.

  In a highly accurate and low base state, the big hit judgment result using R1 does not make a big hit, the small hit judgment result using R8 does not make a big hit, and the reach judgment result using R5 generates reach When the non-reach deviation determination is not performed, the non-reach deviation determination data table is used.

  When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 94”, a variation pattern of “outside A variation pattern no primary re-lottery / post mission mode” having a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “95 to 99”, “no chance chance C variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. The “post mission mode” in the case of the non-reach miss determination data table is information indicating the first mission mode.

  Also, in the high and low base state, the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit, the small hit determination result using R8 is not a small hit, and the reach determination result using R5 is reach. The reach deviation determination time data table in which the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is determined as follows is used. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 49”, “no reach A fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. The “rear mission mode” in the case of the data table at the time of determining the reach deviation is information indicating the first mission mode. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “50 to 99”, “no reach B variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  In the state of high accuracy and low base, when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit and the big hit is 15R normal big hit according to the decision result of the big hit type using R2, the data at the time of 15R normal big hit decision A table is used. In the 15R normal big hit determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, “15R big hit A fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery and later short mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. Here, the “short time short mode” is information indicating that the time short mode is set after the fluctuation display (after big hit, after big hit). When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “15 to 29”, “15R big hit A fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery no / rear short mode” with a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery and later short mode” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “63 to 99”, “no 15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / rear short time mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, in the state of high accuracy and low base, when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is 15R probability variable big hit A based on the determination result of the big hit type using R2, the 15R probability variable big hit A data table when A is determined is used. In the 15R probability variation big hit A determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern to be selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, “15R big hit A variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “15 to 29”, the “15R big hit A variation pattern primary no re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability changing mode” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “63 to 99”, the “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery no / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Also, in the state of high accuracy and low base, when the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit and the big hit is 15R probability variable big hit B based on the result of determining the big hit type using R2, the 15R probability variable big hit A data table for determining B is used. In the 15R probability variation big hit B determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, “15R big hit A variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. The “rear mission mode” in the case of the 15R probability variable big hit B determination data table is information indicating the first mission mode. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “15 to 29”, “15R big hit A variation pattern primary no re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a fluctuation display time of 25 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “63 to 99”, “15R big hit B fluctuation pattern primary no re-lottery / post mission mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, in the state of high accuracy and low base, the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B depending on the decision result of the big hit type using R2. In some cases, a data table for determining 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B is used. In the data table at the time of determination of 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 49”, “no chance C variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “50 to 99”, “no chance change D variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, in the state of high accuracy and low base, when the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit and the small hit determination result using R8 is a small hit, the data table at the time of determining the small hit is used. . In the small hit determination time data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “no chance C variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. The “post mission mode” in the case of the small hit determination time data table is information indicating the first mission mode. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no chance D variation pattern primary re-lottery / post mission mode” with a variation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined.

  21 and 22 are diagrams for explaining the shortening variation pattern table in a table format. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the high-accuracy base data table in a table format. In the high-accuracy base data table among the shortened variation pattern tables, the result of the big hit determination using R1, the result of the big hit type determination using R2, the result of the reach determination using R5, and R8 are used. Based on the result of the small hit determination, the non-reach deviation determination data table, the reach deviation determination data table, the 15R normal big hit determination data table, the 15R positive variation big hit A / 15R positive variable big hit B decision data table, and the 2R positive variable big hit A・ 2R probability variable big hit B / small hit data table is used properly.

  In the state of high accuracy and high accuracy, the big hit judgment result using R1 is not big hit, the small hit judgment result using R8 is not big hit, and the reach judgment result using R5 generates reach When the non-reach deviation determination is not performed, the non-reach deviation determination data table is used.

  When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 94”, a variation pattern of “out of E variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 5 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “95 to 99”, “no outlier G variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. Unlike the above-described “miss chance miss”, the “out of” in the case where the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “95 to 99” is a non-reach miss and the display result of the non-chance eye miss is This is information indicating that it is derived and displayed.

  Also, in the state of high accuracy and high accuracy, the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit, the small hit determination result using R8 is not a small hit, and the reach determination result using R5 is reach. When the reach deviation to be generated is determined, a reach deviation determination data table in which the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is determined as follows is used. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the “reach E variation pattern no primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no reach F variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  In the state of high accuracy and high base, when the big hit judgment result using R1 is a big hit and the big hit is 15R normal big hit according to the decision result of the big hit type using R2, the data at the time of 15R normal big hit decision A table is used. In the 15R normal big hit determination data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, “15R big hit E fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery and later short mode” with a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “15 to 29”, “15R big hit E fluctuation pattern primary no re-lottery / rear short time mode” with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit F fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / rear short mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “63 to 99”, “no 15R big hit F fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / rear short time mode” with a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  In the state of high accuracy and high base, the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is 15R probability variation big hit A or 15R probability variation big hit B depending on the decision result of the big hit type using R2. In some cases, a data table for determining 15R probability variation big hit A and 15R probability variation big hit B is used. In the data table at the time of determining 15R probability variation big hit A and 15R probability variation big hit B, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern to be selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 14”, the “15R big hit E variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “15 to 29”, the “15R big hit E variation pattern primary no re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “30 to 62”, “15R big hit F fluctuation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability changing mode” with a fluctuation display time of 20 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “63 to 99”, the “15R big hit F fluctuation pattern primary no re-lottery / post-probability changing mode” with a fluctuation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  Also, in the state of high accuracy and high base, the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B depending on the decision result of the big hit type using R2. When the big hit judgment result using R1 is not a big hit and the small hit judgment result using R8 is a small hit, 2R probability variable big hit A, 2R probability variable big hit B, small hit decision A time data table is used. In the data table at the time of determining 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, and small hit, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “no chance G variation pattern primary re-lottery / post-probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no chance H variation pattern primary re-lottery / probability variation mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the low-accuracy base time data table in a table format. In the low-accuracy base data table among the shortened fluctuation pattern tables, the result of the big hit determination using R1, the result of the big hit type determination using R2, the result of the reach determination using R5, and R8 are used. Based on the result of the small hit determination, the non-reach deviation determination data table, the reach deviation determination data table, the 15R normal big hit determination data table, the 15R accurate variable big hit A / 15R positive variable big hit B decision data table, and the 2R positive variable big hit A・ 2R probability variable big hit B determination data table and small hit determination data table are used properly.

  In the low-accuracy and high-base state, the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit, the small hit determination result using R8 is not a small hit, and the reach determination result using R5 does not generate reach. When it is at the time of non-reach shift determination, the data table at the time of non-reach shift determination is used.

  When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 94”, a variation pattern of “out of E variation pattern primary no re-lottery / rear short mode” with a variation display time of 5 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “95 to 99”, “no outlier G variation pattern primary re-lottery / rear time reduction mode” with a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined.

  Further, in the low accuracy and high accuracy state, the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit, the small hit determination result using R8 is not a small hit, and the reach determination result using R5 is reach. The reach deviation determination time data table in which the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is determined as follows is used. When the extracted value of R4 is within the range of “0 to 49”, “the reach E fluctuation pattern primary no re-lottery / rear time reduction mode” with a fluctuation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no reach F variation pattern primary re-lottery / rear short mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  For each of the 15R normal big hit determination data table and the 15R accurate variable big hit A / 15R accurate variable big hit B decision data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is based on the high accurate high base. The same as in the case of the data table.

  In the low-accuracy-high base state, the big hit determination result using R1 is a big hit, and the big hit is 2R-probable big hit A or 2R-probable big hit B depending on the result of determining the big hit type using R2. In this case, the data table at the time of determining 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B is used. The relationship between the extracted value of R4 in the data table at the time of determination of the 2R probability variation big hit A and 2R probability variation big hit B and the variation pattern selected and determined is as follows. As with the small hit determination data table, a variation pattern including information on “chance per chance” and “post-probability change mode” is selected.

  Also, in the low-accuracy and high-base state, when the big hit determination result using R1 is not a big hit and the small hit determination result using R8 is a small hit, the data table for determining the small hit is used. . In the small hit determination time data table, the relationship between the extracted value of R4 and the variation pattern selected and determined is defined as follows. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “0 to 49”, “no chance G variation pattern primary re-lottery / after-short-time mode” with a variation display time of 10 seconds is selected and determined. When the extracted value of R4 is in the range of “50 to 99”, “no chance H variation pattern primary re-lottery / after-short-time mode” with a variation display time of 15 seconds is selected and determined.

  19 to 22, the command number of the variation pattern command transmitted corresponding to the selected variation pattern is shown in the right column (command No. column) of each variation pattern selected in the data table. Has been. The variation pattern command is a command for instructing the start of variation display of the variation display device 9 and the contents of effects including the variation pattern in the variation display. The command numbers shown in FIGS. 19 to 22 correspond to the command numbers shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 described later.

  Note that the variation pattern used for the variation display in the present embodiment is the variation pattern setting process described later with reference to FIG. 55 when the variation display is started in the variation display unit as will be described later. This is determined by looking up the data table described in FIG.

  Next, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 will be described. 23 and 24 are diagrams showing an example of the effect control command in a table format. In FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, a command number is assigned to each effect control command, and the command name and the content of the command are shown in association with each other.

  First, the variation pattern command will be described. Referring to FIG. 23, the commands of variation patterns # 1 to # 36 without primary re-lottery are variation pattern commands for designating variation patterns without primary re-lottery. For example, as described with reference to FIGS. It shows various fluctuation patterns without primary re-lottery. The commands of variation patterns # 37 to # 48 with primary re-lottery are variation pattern commands for designating variation patterns with primary re-lottery. For example, there are primary re-lotteries described with reference to FIGS. These show various fluctuation patterns.

  The symbol information command is a command used to instruct a decorative symbol variation display result, and is also a command indicating a determination result of jackpot determination and a determination result of jackpot type. More specifically, the symbol information command is a command for designating information on the secondary re-lottery display as to whether to control off, small hit, 15R normal big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, or 2R probability variation big hit.

  The command for designating the detachment is a symbol information command for designating the detachment. The small hit designation command is a symbol information command that designates small hit. The 15R normal jackpot / secondary lottery no-designation command is 15R normal jackpot, second re-lottery display, and symbol information that specifies that the second re-lottery display will not be achieved It is a command. Here, the term “upward” means that the re-lottery display is changed (increased) from a non-probable big hit to a probable big hit.

  The 15R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery designation command is a symbol information command that designates 15R probability variable big hit and that the secondary re-lottery display is not executed. Here, “without secondary re-lottery” indicates that the secondary re-lottery display is not performed.

  The command specified for completion after 15R probability variation big hit and secondary re-lottery shall be 15R probability variation big hit (including both 15R probability variation big hit A and B), secondary re-lottery display, and secondary re- It is a symbol information command for designating completion in the lottery display. The 2R probability variation big hit / secondary re-lottery designation command is a symbol information command that designates 2R probability variation big hit (including both 2R probability variation big hits A and B) and no secondary re-lottery display. is there. In the case of this embodiment, when the 2R probability variation big hit, the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display are not executed.

  Next, the background designation command will be described with reference to FIG. The background designation command is a command for designating a background image associated with each of the low accuracy low base, high accuracy high base, low accuracy high base, and high accuracy low base states. For example, the background image associated with each of the low accuracy low base, the high accuracy high base, the low accuracy high base, and the high accuracy low base has a different background image color for each probability / base state. In the production control microcomputer 800, in principle, the production control mode is determined by the variation display result of the decorative design designated by the design information command and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command, as will be described later. When the data of these commands is garbled, etc., there is a risk of producing an effect that does not match the actual state over a long period of time. Therefore, in order to prevent such an effect that does not match the actual state, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm whether or not the effect control microcomputer 800 can perform an effect consistent with the actual state. Therefore, a background designation command is transmitted every time a variable display is performed.

  The effect control microcomputer 800 checks the content of the received background designation command every time it performs variable display, and produces an effect based on the background image displayed corresponding to the effect control mode determined on the effect control microcomputer 800 side. It is determined whether the performance is consistent with the actual state. For example, when the effect control mode determined on the effect control microcomputer 800 side is the probability change mode, when a background designation command other than the high-accuracy base state background designation command is received, the effect by the background image is the actual state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is not consistent, and when a highly accurate base state background designation command is received, it is determined that the effect based on the background image is an effect consistent with the actual state. Then, when it is determined that the effect by the background image is an effect that matches the actual state, the effect is executed as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect by the background image is not an effect that is consistent with the actual state, the selection of the effect by the background image is changed so that the effect is consistent with the actual state specified by the background designation command. Control is performed.

  Next, the hit start command will be described. Referring to FIG. 24, the hit start command includes a command indicating that the big hit gaming state starts and a command indicating that the small hit gaming state starts. In this example, in addition to the information on the start of the big hit gaming state, the information on the type of the big hit, the presence / absence of the second re-lottery display, and the presence / absence of the rise is specified by the hit start command. Since the presence / absence of the secondary re-lottery display is specified for the winning start command, the presence / absence of success can be determined by the production control microcomputer 800 if the type of the big hit is specified. In order to specify whether or not there is a rise, information that specifies the type of jackpot or information that specifies the presence or absence of the rise may be used.

  The 15R normal jackpot start and the command to specify no success after the second re-lottery will not start in the 15R normal big hit jackpot game state, the second re-lottery display, and the secondary re-drawer display will not succeed This is a start command for specifying that.

  The 15R probability variable big hit start / secondary re-lottery designation command starts the big hit gaming state of 15R probability variable big hit (including both 15R probability variable big hit A and B) and does not execute the secondary re-lottery display This is a start command for specifying.

  The 15R probability variable big hit A start and the command with completion after re-lottery are to start the big hit gaming state of 15R probability variable big hit (including both 15R probability variable big hit A and B), to display the secondary re-lottery, And a hit start command for designating completion in the secondary re-lottery display.

  The 2R probability variable big hit start / secondary re-lottery designation command starts the big hit gaming state of 2R probability variable big hit (including both 2R probability variable big hit A and B) and does not execute the secondary re-lottery display This is a start command for specifying. The command for specifying the small hit start / no secondary re-lottery is a hit start command for specifying that the small hit gaming state starts and that the secondary re-lottery display is not executed.

  Next, the ending display command will be described. Referring to FIG. 24, the ending display command includes a jackpot end display that is performed when the 15R jackpot gaming state ends, a jackpot end display that is performed when the 2R probability variable jackpot gaming state ends, and a small jackpot gaming state. This is a command for designating the contents of the ending display, which is a generic term for presentation displays such as a small hit end display performed at the end. In this example, for the 15R jackpot end display by the ending display command, in addition to the information of the end of the jackpot gaming state, the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of the second re-lottery display, the presence / absence of completion, and after the jackpot gaming state Information related to the display indicating the effect control mode is also specified.

  The command for specifying no display after the second re-lottery and normal mode display is a command for specifying that the probability change big hit is not achieved in the second re-lottery display, and that the normal mode display is displayed after the big hit gaming state. is there. The command for specifying no display after completion of the second re-lottery / time-short mode display is a command for specifying that the probability change big hit will not be achieved in the secondary re-lottery display, and that the display will be in the short-time mode after the big hit gaming state. is there. The command to indicate that there is a rise after the second re-lottery and to specify the probability change mode display is a command to specify that the probability change big win will be achieved in the secondary re-lottery display, and that the display will become the probability change mode after the big win gaming state. . The command for completion after the second re-lottery / mission mode display designation is a command for designating that it will rise to a probable big hit in the secondary re-lottery display and that the display will be in the mission mode.

  No secondary re-lottery / probability mode display designation command specifies that the jackpot end display for 15R probability variation jackpot will be displayed without secondary re-lottery display, and that the probability change mode will be displayed after the jackpot game state. It is a command to do. No jackpot secondary lottery / Mission mode display designation command displays the jackpot end display of 15R probability variable jackpot without displaying the secondary relottery display, and displays the mission mode after the jackpot gaming state The command to specify.

  The 2R probability variable big hit end display / probability change mode display designation command does not display the secondary re-lottery display, but at the end of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state, it will display the probability change mode later (since 2R probability variable big hit, secondary re- This is a command for designating “no lottery display”. The 2R probability variable big hit end display / mission mode display designation command does not display the secondary re-lottery display, but at the end of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state, it will display the mission mode later. This is a command for designating “no lottery display”.

  The small hit end display / short time mode display designation command is a command for designating that the short time mode will be displayed later at the end of the small hit gaming state (the secondary re-lottery display is not performed because of the small hit). The small hit end display / probability change mode display designation command is a command for designating that the probability change mode will be displayed later at the end of the small hit gaming state (the secondary re-lottery display is not performed because of the small hit). The small hit end display / mission mode display designation command is a command for designating that the mission mode is to be displayed later at the end of the small hit gaming state (the secondary re-lottery display is not performed because of the small hit).

  Since the presence / absence of the secondary re-lottery display is specified for the ending display command, if the type of jackpot is specified, the presence / absence of completion can be determined by the production control microcomputer 800. For this reason, for the ending display command, in order to specify the presence or absence of the rise, information specifying the type of jackpot instead of the information specifying the presence or absence of the rise (for example, “No rise after the second re-lottery Instead of the information “”, information “probable big hit after secondary re-lottery” may be used.

  Next, various information signals output from the information output circuit 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the symbol determination number 1 signal output as an information signal.

  FIG. 25 shows the relationship between the state of special symbol fluctuation and stoppage and the symbol determination frequency 1 signal. When the special symbol is stopped after the variable display is started, the symbol determination number 1 signal is changed from the OFF state to the ON state from the time of the stop until the elapse of a predetermined time T1 (for example, 500 ms). By counting the number of times such a symbol determination number 1 signal is turned on, it is possible to grasp the number of times the special symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 26 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and one jackpot signal output as an information signal. In FIG. 26, the variation of the special symbol, the state of the stop, the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the state of the stop, the operation of the big hit gaming state (open), the state of stop (closed), and one signal per jackpot The relationship is shown.

  When a small hit is made, the big hit 1 signal is changed from the off state to the on state when a predetermined time T2 elapses from when the special symbol variation display is stopped to when the symbol displayed at the time of the stop is displayed. Become. The big hit 1 signal is changed from the on state to the off state when a predetermined time T3 has elapsed from the stop of the operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 due to the end of the small hit state. Become. Further, when a big hit is made, when the operation of the big hit gaming state is started (for example, at the start of the pre-opening of the big winning opening in S145 described later), the big hit 1 signal is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, and when the big hit gaming state is stopped The jackpot 1 signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state (for example, at the end of the hit end process in S147 described later). On the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on such a big hit 1 signal, it is possible to grasp the period during which the small hit and big hit gaming states are occurring, as well as the number of times the small hit and big hit have occurred. can do.

  FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and two jackpot signals output as information signals. FIG. 27 shows the relationship between the operation of the short-time function, the state of stop, the state of high probability and low probability of jackpot probability, the state of operation and stop of the jackpot game state, and the jackpot two signals.

  The big hit 2 signal changes from the off state to the on state at the start of operation in the big hit gaming state, and the big hit 2 signal changes from the on state to the off state when the big hit gaming state stops. Further, when the time-shortening function is activated, that is, in the high-accuracy base state or the low-accuracy-base state, the big hit 2 signal is turned on, and at the end of the short-time state, the big hit 2 signal is changed from the on state to the off state. Become. Thus, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when the big hit gaming state and the high accuracy base or the low accuracy base in a state other than the big hit gaming state. On the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on these two jackpot signals, it is possible to grasp the period when the jackpot gaming state and the short-time state, and the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the short-time state are reached. Can be grasped.

  FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the probability variation 2 signal output as an information signal. FIG. 28 shows the relationship between the operation of the short-time function, the state of stop, the state of high probability and low probability of jackpot probability, the state of operation and stop of the jackpot game state, and the probability variation 2 signal.

  When the time reduction function is activated, that is, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability variation 2 signal is turned on in the high accuracy base state or the low accuracy base state. On the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on such a probability variation 2 signal, it is possible to grasp the period when it is in the short-time state, and it is possible to grasp the number of times it has become short-time state.

  FIG. 29 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the probability variation 1 signal output as an information signal. FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the operation of the short-time function, the state of stop, the state of high probability and low probability of jackpot probability, the state of operation and stop of the jackpot game state, and the probability variation 1 signal.

  When the big hit probability is high, that is, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability variation 1 signal is turned on in the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state. On the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on such a probability variation 1 signal, it is possible to grasp the period when the probability variation state is established, and to grasp the number of times the probability variation state has occurred.

  FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and three jackpot signals output as information signals. FIG. 30 shows the relationship between the special symbol fluctuation, the stop state, and the operation / stop state of the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot three signals.

  When the special symbol variation display is stopped with the big hit display result of 15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit A, or 15R normal big hit B, the big hit is from the start of the big hit gaming state until the stop. 3 signal is turned on. On the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on these three jackpot signals, it is possible to grasp the period when the jackpot gaming state continues for 15R, and to grasp the number of times that the jackpot game is 15R. Can do.

  By outputting such an information signal, for example, it is possible to grasp that a small hit has occurred when one big hit signal is on and two big hits are off. It becomes possible to grasp the current control state and the type of jackpot that has occurred.

  Next, an example of image display performed by the variable display device 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of 2R probability variation big hit B and a small hit display example in the normal mode as display example 1 in the normal mode. In FIG. 31, the display state on the fluctuation display device 9 is basically shown, but in order to explain the display relationship between the fluctuation display device 9 and the special symbol indicator 8, The display state of the special symbol 81 on the special symbol display 8 is shown at the position. The display state of the special symbol display 8 in this manner is the same in FIGS. 32 to 41 in addition to FIG.

  In FIG. 31, (a1) to (a5) show display examples of 2R probability variation big hit B, and (b1) to (b5) show display examples of small hits. When the variable display is performed, as shown in (a1), the special symbol 81 in the special symbol display 8 and the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 of the decorative symbol in the variable display device 9 are simultaneously varied. Display is started (a downward arrow in the figure indicates that the symbol is changing). In the variable display device 9, a predetermined character 901 related to the effect of variable display is displayed in addition to the decorative pattern.

  The left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 are in a predetermined order (the order of the left symbol 91, the right symbol 93, and the middle symbol 92) according to the passage of time from the start of fluctuation. Displayed sequentially. The special symbol 81 is stopped and displayed at the same time when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the special symbol 81 is displayed at the timing when all the symbols of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 are stopped and displayed. 81 is stopped).

  When the 2R probability variable big hit B is reached, as shown in (a2), the stop display result of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 becomes the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variable big hit display result, and is special. The stop display result of the symbol 81 is “9” as the 2R probability variation big hit B display result. In this case, since the transition to the first mission mode is made after the jackpot gaming state is finished, as shown in (a3), a message indicating that the mission mode (first mission mode) is entered is displayed. It is notified that the mission mode is started. After that, the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state is reached in which the big winning opening is opened twice. The display content of the effect display in the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state is not the display of the number of rounds being executed and is not the display content divided in round units. For example, during the period of the first and second rounds of the character, etc. The display contents are continuously operated over a period of time. Such a 2R probability variation jackpot effect allows the player to feel that the 2R probability variation jackpot has suddenly changed into a promising state without going through the jackpot gaming state, and provides the player with a variety of gaming states. can do.

  At the end of the big hit gaming state, as shown in (a4), for example, the content of a mission (task) such as “Get out character X within 30 revolutions” is notified. The contents of the mission are selected randomly. After the jackpot gaming state ends, as shown in (a5), a message 902 for specifying the mission content and the remaining variable display count 903 in the mission are displayed, and the display mode of the character 901 is the mission mode. The display mode (for example, the display mode in which the character indicates the message “mission mode”) can be changed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state shown in (a5) is continued until the mission is completed, and in such a state, the change display in the first mission mode is performed.

  The mission in this case is such that if a predetermined character X (for example, the character X shown in FIG. 35) appears before the variable display is performed 30 times, a big hit will occur. In the case of this mission, when the 15R big hit is made until the variable display is performed 30 times, the character X is displayed, the display indicating that the mission is achieved is performed, and the mission is completed. On the other hand, when the big hit is not made 30 times before the change display is performed, the display for causing the character X to appear is not performed, the display indicating that the mission has not been achieved is performed, and the mission ends, or will be described later. Such additional missions are conducted. The message specifying the mission content in the mission mode is displayed at the following timing. In the case of 15R normal big hit and 15R probability variable big hit, it is performed at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the case of 2R probability variable big hit, it is performed during the big hit gaming state (including when the big hit gaming state starts and when the ending display is displayed). In the case of the small hit, it is performed during the small hit game (including the start of the small hit game state and the ending display). In the case of deviation, it is performed between the end of the variable display and the start of the next variable display. Further, the effect indicating whether or not the mission in the mission mode is achieved is performed only in the case of 15R normal big hit and 15R probability big hit, and is performed at the start of the variable display.

  When the small hit is reached, after the variable display is started as shown in (b1), the stop display results of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 are changed as shown in (b2). “135” as a chance, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes “0” as the small hit display result. In this case, since the transition to the second mission mode is made after the end of the small hit gaming state, the mission mode is started by displaying a message indicating that the mission mode is entered as shown in (b3). To be notified. After that, a small hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice. In the small hit gaming state, an effect display with the same display contents as the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state is performed.

  At the end of the small hit gaming state, as shown in (b4), for example, the content of a mission (task) such as “get reach α within 10 revolutions” is notified. The contents of the mission are selected randomly. Then, after the end of the small hit gaming state, as shown in (b5), the message 902 for specifying the mission content and the remaining variable display count 903 in the mission are displayed as in the case of 2R probability variable big hit. The display mode of the character 901 can be changed to a display mode that specifies that the character is in the mission mode (for example, a display mode in which the character indicates the message “mission mode”). If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (b5) is continued until the mission is completed, as in the case of 2R probability variation big hit, and in such a state, the variation display in the second mission mode is performed.

  The mission in this case is that 15R jackpot will occur if a predetermined reach α (for example, reach with an odd number of symbols) appears by the time when the variable display is performed ten times. In the case of this mission, if the 15R big hit is made until the change display is performed 10 times, the change display that reaches reach α is performed, the display indicating that the mission is achieved is performed, and the mission is completed. On the other hand, if the 15R big hit is not made before the change display is performed 10 times, the change display indicating reach α is not performed, and a display indicating that the mission has not been achieved is performed and the mission is completed, or described later. Additional missions are performed.

  In this way, when the 2R probability variation big hit B and the small hit are obtained, the chance display ("135") which is the same display result is displayed, and the big winning opening is opened twice. After the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is operated in the same manner, notification is made that the mission mode is set without specifying whether the first mission mode or the second mission mode is set. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the mission performed in the mission mode after the end of the big hit gaming state is a mission in a low probability low base state or a mission in a high probability low base state.

  FIG. 32 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of miss chance chance in the normal mode and a display example of 2R probability variation big hit A as display example 2 in the normal mode.

  In FIG. 32, (c1) to (c5) show display examples of miss chance chances, and (d1) to (d4) show display examples of 2R probability variation big hit A. When the chance is lost in the normal mode, after the variable display is started as shown in (c1), the stop display results of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 are displayed as shown in (c2). The chance display is “579” as the missed display result, and the special symbol 81 stop display result is the missed display result such as “2”. In this case, since the transition to the second mission mode is made after the end of the variable display, the mission mode is started by displaying a message indicating that the mission mode is entered as shown in (c3). As shown in (c4), for example, the content of a mission (issue) such as “put out a character X within 20 revolutions” is notified. The contents of the mission are selected randomly. Then, as shown in (c5), as in the case of the 2R probability variation big hit, a message 902 specifying the mission content and the remaining variable display count 903 in the mission are displayed, and the display mode of the character 901 is The display mode can be changed to specify that the mission mode is being executed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (c5) is continued until the mission is completed as in the case of 2R probability variation big hit, and in such a state, the fluctuation display in the second mission mode is performed.

  In the normal mode, when the 2R probability variation big hit A is obtained, after the variable display is started as shown in (d1), the stop display result of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 as shown in (d2). Becomes the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variation jackpot display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes “7” as the 2R probability variation jackpot A display result. In this case, since the mode changes to the probability change mode after the end of the big hit gaming state, as shown in (d3), the message indicating the entry into the probability change mode is displayed, and the probability change mode is started. Is notified. Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice, as shown in (d4), a display mode (for example, “probability change”) that specifies that the display mode of the character 901 is in the probability change mode. To the display mode indicated by the character). If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (d4) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  Next, a display example in the first mission mode will be described. FIG. 33 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B in the first mission mode and a small hit display example as display example 1 in the first mission mode.

  When the 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B is achieved in the first mission mode, as shown in (e2) after the variable display is started in the display state in the first mission mode as shown in (e1), The stop display result of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 becomes the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variable big hit display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes “2R probability variable big hit A display result“ 7 "or 2R probability variation big hit B display result is" 9 ". In this case, since the transition to the probability variation mode is made after the big hit gaming state is finished, the message indicating that the probability variation mode is entered is displayed as shown in (e3), and the probability variation mode is started. Is notified. Then, after the end of the big hit gaming state where the big winning opening is opened twice, as shown in (e4), a display mode (for example, “probability change”) that specifies that the display mode of the character 901 is in the probability change mode. To the display mode indicated by the character). If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (e4) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  When a small hit is made in the first mission mode, after the variable display is started in the display state in the first mission mode as shown in (f1), as shown in (f2), the left symbol 91 and the middle symbol 92 are displayed. The stop display result of the right symbol 93 becomes the chance of “135” as the small hit display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes “0” as the small hit display result. In this case, since the first mission mode is maintained after the end of the small hit gaming state, as shown in (f3), for example, an addition such as “Get out character X within 30 additional missions!” The details of the mission will be notified. The contents of the mission are selected randomly. When a mission is added in this way, the mission before the addition is invalidated and the added mission is valid. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a mission is added, both the mission before being added and the added mission may be valid. In that case, when a big hit is made, an effect is achieved in which either the mission before being added or the added mission is achieved. Then, after the end of the small hit gaming state where the big winning opening is opened twice, as shown in (f4), as in the case of 2R probability variation big hit in the normal mode, a message 902 for specifying the mission content, The remaining change display count 903 is displayed, and the display mode of the character 901 is changed to a display mode that specifies that it is in the mission mode. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state shown in (f4) is continued until the mission is completed, and in such a state, the change display in the first mission mode is performed.

  As described above, the first mission mode is a mode in the high-probability low base state, but unlike the probability change mode in the high-probability high-base state, which is the same high-probability state, the fact that it is in a high-probability state is notified. do not do. Thus, even when the high probability state is not notified, the player recognizes that there may be a high probability state, so the high probability state is not notified. However, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of a high probability state. In addition, when a mission effect is performed when a high-probability state is not notified, the player can have a sense of expectation that the state is in a high-probability state. Can be improved. In addition, since the mission performance is performed in the low accuracy low base state and the high accuracy low base state, the overall average when the mission performance is performed as compared to the case where the mission performance is performed only in the low accuracy low base state. The probability of occurrence of a big hit is increased.

  FIG. 34 is a display screen diagram showing an example of a missed chance display in the first mission mode and a display example when the mission period ends without being able to achieve the mission, as display example 2 in the first mission mode. .

  When the chance is lost in the first mission mode, after the variable display is started in the display state in the first mission mode as in (g1), as shown in (g2), the left symbol 91 and the middle symbol are displayed. The stop display result of 92 and the right symbol 93 becomes the chance of “579” as the missed display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes the missed symbol such as “2” as the missed display result. In this case, since the first mission mode is maintained after the end of the variable display, as shown in (g3), for example, an additional mission such as “put out the character X within 30 additional missions” is performed. Will be notified. The contents of the mission are selected randomly. Then, as shown in (g4), as in the case of the small hit in the first mission mode, the message 902 for specifying the mission content and the remaining variable display count 903 in the mission are displayed, and the character 901 is displayed. The display mode for specifying that the display mode is in the mission mode is continued. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state shown in (g4) is continued until the mission is completed, and in such a state, the change display in the first mission mode is performed.

  When the mission period is terminated without completing the mission in the first mission mode, the variation display is displayed in the display state in the first mission mode such as (h1) in which the remaining variation display count 903 becomes “0”. After the start, as shown in (h2), the stop display results of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 become a combination of the symbols that are out of sync, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 is “2” or the like. It becomes an outlier design. Then, as shown in (h3), for example, by displaying a message such as “Mission period end! Not achieved ...”, it is notified that the mission period cannot be achieved and the mission period ends. The In this case, since the transition to the high-accuracy notification mode is made after the end of the variable display, as shown in (h4), the display mode character 904 for specifying the high-accuracy notification mode is used instead of the character 901. Appearing display is performed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (h4) is continued until the high-accuracy notification mode ends, and in such a state, the variable display in the high-accuracy notification mode is performed.

  Thus, in the first mission mode, since the change display is performed a predetermined number of times by the mission effect, the high probability state is notified by shifting to the high probability notification mode. The player can recognize that the current mission mode is the first mission mode. Thereby, when it is in the first mission mode, it is possible to alleviate the disadvantage that the player feels when the big hit is not made for a long time in the mission mode. On the other hand, when the second mission mode is finished, after the display as shown in (h1) to (h3) is performed, the display shifts to the display in the normal mode as shown in FIG. As described above, the first mission mode and the second mission mode differ in the effect display when the mission is not achieved, so that the player is in any state of probability / base state by viewing the effect display. Can be recognized.

  Next, a display example related to the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display will be described as a representative example of the variable display performed in the first mission mode. FIG. 35 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of 15R normal big hit A when primary re-lottery display and secondary re-lottery display are performed as re-lottery related display example 1.

  In the first mission mode, when a 15R big hit such as 15R probability variable big hit A, for example, the character X is sent to the message 902 specifying the mission content such as “Get out character X!” Like (i1). The display that achieves the mission of making the character appear is performed from the start of the variable display. In addition, the display that achieves the mission such as the appearance of the character X is not limited to the time when the variable display is started, but is displayed during the variable display (the period from the start of the variable display until the temporary stop. As long as it is performed), it may be performed at any timing.

  When the first re-lottery display is performed, as shown in (i2), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (temporary stop display) with the non-probable big hit display result to be a temporary stop symbol, and then, as shown in (i3) In addition, the fact that it is a re-lottery display is displayed, and the decorative re-display of the decorative symbols is started again, whereby the primary re-lottery display is started. Then, as shown in (i4), the decorative symbol variation display is stopped and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed, whereby the display result in the first re-lottery display is displayed and the jackpot gaming state is started. At this time, the special symbol 81 is stopped and displayed with a probability variation big hit symbol such as “3”. In the example of FIG. 35, since the secondary re-lottery is executed after the start of the big hit gaming state, a non-probable big hit display result that is not a combination of the probable big hit symbols is derived and displayed in the primary re-lottery.

  When the big hit gaming state is started, a big hit start display indicating that the big hit gaming state (15R big hit) as shown in (i5) is started is performed. Then, a big hit gaming state that continues for a maximum of 15 rounds from the first round to the fifteenth round is performed.

  When the secondary re-lottery display is performed, for example, the secondary re-lottery display as shown in (i6) and (i7) is performed at the end of the big hit gaming state. In the secondary re-lottery display, as shown in (i6), the fact that it is a re-lottery display is displayed, and an image of a target game in which the character 901 hits the target 905 with an arrow is displayed. Note that the secondary re-lottery display is not limited to the display example shown in the figure, and any display that allows the player to grasp that the re-lottery display is being performed may be used. Any display may be used, such as performing an effect of deriving and displaying the display result. As a result of the secondary re-lottery display, it is shown that if the arrow hits the probability variation area provided in the target 905 as the display result of the target game, it will rise to the probability variation big hit as a result of the secondary re-lottery display. It is. On the other hand, if the target hit game display result is that an arrow hits an outlier area other than the probability change area provided at the target 905, the result of the secondary re-lottery display indicates that the probability change big hit is not achieved. In this display example, (i7) shows an example where the probability variation is achieved. As a result of the secondary re-lottery display, when the probability big hit is achieved, as shown in (i7), the fact that the probability big hit is achieved is notified by a predetermined message using the character 901 or the like. On the other hand, as a result of the secondary re-lottery display, when the probability variation big hit is not achieved, as shown in (k4) of FIG. 36, the fact that the probability variation big hit is not achieved is notified by a predetermined message or the like using the character 901.

  In this case, since the mode changes to the probability change mode after the end of the big hit gaming state, a message indicating that the probability change mode is entered as shown in (i8) is displayed, thereby informing that the probability change mode is started. . Then, as shown in (i9), the display mode of the character 901 is changed to a display mode that specifies that the probability change mode is being performed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (i9) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  In FIG. 35, the display example of the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display has been described by taking the first mission mode as an example. In the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display in the effect control mode other than the first mission mode, the same effects as the effects by the display shown in FIG. 35 are performed except for the mission effect character X.

  Next, a display example when the secondary re-lottery display is performed without the primary re-lottery display will be described as a representative example when the 15R probability variable big hit B and the 15R normal big hit are achieved in the first mission mode. To do. FIG. 36 is a display screen showing a display example of 15R probability variable big hit B and a display example of 15R normal big hit when the secondary re-lottery display is performed without the primary re-lottery display as the second re-lottery related display example 2. FIG.

  In the first mission mode, when the 15R probability variation big hit B is reached, although not shown, the display for achieving the same mission as the above (i1) is performed from the start of the variable display. When the secondary re-lottery display is executed without executing the primary re-lottery display and the outcome is a probable big hit, the variation display result before the start of the big win gaming state is displayed as shown in (j1). A winning game state is started by deriving and displaying the probability variation jackpot display result. In this example, the decorative symbols are displayed with 4 stoppages as the 15R normal jackpot display result, and the special symbols are displayed with “5” as the 15R probability variable jackpot B display result.

  When the big hit gaming state is started, after the big hit start display as shown in (j2) is performed, the big hit gaming state is continued for the maximum 15 rounds from the first round to the fifteenth round. Then, as shown in (j3) and (j4), at the end of the big hit gaming state, a secondary re-lottery display for displaying an image of the hitting game is performed. In this display example, an example in which an arrow hits the probability variation area as a display result of the hitting game and the probability variation is achieved is shown in (j4).

  In this case, since the first mission mode is maintained after the end of the big hit gaming state, as shown in (j5), for example, a message such as “Continue mission mode! Put out character X within 30 rotations!” By being displayed, the mission mode is continued and the content of the new mission is notified by a message. The contents of the mission are selected randomly. Then, as shown in (j6), a message 902 specifying the mission content and the remaining variable display count 903 in the mission are displayed, and the display mode of the character 901 specifies that the mission mode is in the mission mode. Continue in display mode. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (j6) is continued until the mission is completed, and in such a state, the change display in the first mission mode is performed.

  When the 15R normal big hit is made in the first mission mode, as in the display example described above, although not shown, a display that achieves the same mission (in this example, “put out character Y!”). In response to the message 902 specifying the mission content, a display for achieving the mission of causing the character Y to appear) is performed from the start of the variable display. Then, when the secondary re-lottery is executed without executing the primary re-lottery display and the probability variation big win is not achieved, as a variation display result before the start of the big hit gaming state, as shown in (k1), A big hit gaming state is started by deriving and displaying the non-probable big hit display result. In this example, the decorative symbols are displayed with 4 stoppages as a 15R normal jackpot display result, and the special symbols are displayed with “1” as a 15R normal jackpot display result.

  When the big hit gaming state is started, after the big hit start display as shown in (k2) is performed, the big hit gaming state is continued for a maximum of 15 rounds from the first round to the fifteenth round. Then, as shown in (k3) and (k4), at the end of the big hit gaming state, a secondary re-lottery display for displaying an image of the hitting game is performed. In this display example, an example is shown in (k4) where the target game display result is that an arrow hits the off-region and the probability variation is not achieved.

  In this case, since the mode shifts to the short-time mode after the end of the big hit gaming state, as a result of the secondary re-lottery display, when the probability change big hit is not achieved, as shown in (k5), for example, “100 chance times” When a message such as “!” Is displayed, it is notified that the mode is shifted to the time reduction mode. Then, as shown in (k6), the remaining variable display count 906 in the time reduction mode is displayed, and instead of the character 901, a display mode (for example, “chance time”) that specifies that the time reduction mode is in effect is displayed. The display in which the character 907 in the display mode (in which the character indicates the message) appears is performed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state shown in (k6) is continued until the time reduction mode is completed, and in such a state, the variable display in the time reduction mode is performed.

  Next, a display example when the 15R probability variable big hit is made without performing the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display will be described as a representative example when the 15R probability variable big hit A in the first mission mode. FIG. 37 is a display screen diagram showing a display example when the 15R probability variable big hit A is achieved without performing the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display as the re-lottery related display example 3.

  In the first mission mode, when the 15R probability variation big hit A is reached, as in the display example described above, although not shown in the figure, a display that achieves the same mission (in this example, a mission such as “Take out character Y!”). In response to the message 902 specifying the content, a display that achieves the mission of causing the character Y to appear) is performed from the start of the variable display. When the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display are not executed, as a variation display result before the start of the big hit gaming state, the probability variation big hit display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed as shown in (m1). The jackpot gaming state is started. In this example, the decorative symbol is displayed with the stop 7 of the 7th round as the 15R probability variation jackpot display result, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as “3” as the 15R probability variation jackpot A display result.

  When the big hit gaming state is started, the big hit starting display as shown in (m2) is performed, and then the big hit gaming state is continued for a maximum of 15 rounds from the first round to the fifteenth round. In this case, since the transition to the probability change mode is made after the end of the jackpot gaming state, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, as shown in (m3), a message indicating that the player enters the probability changing mode is displayed. It is notified that the probability variation mode is started. Then, as shown in (m4), the display mode of the character 901 is changed to a display mode that specifies that the probability change mode is being performed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (m4) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  Next, a display example in the second mission mode will be described. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of 2R probability variation big hit B and a small hit display example in the second mission mode as display example 1 in the second mission mode.

  When the 2R probability variation big hit B is obtained in the second mission mode, the same display as that shown in (f1) to (f3) is given by (n1) to (n3) when the small hit is made in the first mission mode. Is done. In this case, since the first mission mode is entered after the end of the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the same as (f4) described above by (n4) A display indicating the mission mode is performed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. Then, the state shown in (n4) is continued until the first mission mode is completed, and in such a state, the variable display in the first mission mode is performed.

  When a small hit is made in the second mission mode, the display similar to the displays (f1) to (f3) performed when the small hit is made in the first mission mode is performed by (o1) to (o3). It is. In this case, since the second mission mode is maintained after the end of the small hit gaming state where the big winning opening is opened twice, the display indicating the mission mode similar to the above (f4) is performed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. Then, the state as shown in (o4) is continued until the second mission mode ends, and in such a state, the variable display in the second mission mode is performed.

  When the 2R probability variation big hit B and the small hit, the same chance result ("135") is displayed and the big winning opening is opened twice. After the special variable winning ball device 20 is operated, a notification is made that the mission mode is set without specifying whether the first mission mode or the second mission mode is set. As a result, for the player, the display result of the decorative symbols, the operation mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the notification of the fact that the mission will be achieved are the same, so that the player can be in the mission mode after the end of the big hit gaming state It becomes difficult to distinguish whether the mission to be performed is a mission in a low accuracy low base state or a mission in a high accuracy low base state.

  FIG. 39 shows a display example of 2R probability variable big hit A in the second mission mode as a display example 2 in the second mission mode, and a 15R normal big hit when the secondary re-lottery display is performed without performing the primary re-lottery display. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display.

  When the 2R probability variation big hit A is obtained in the second mission mode, the steps (e1) to (e3) are carried out when the 2R probability variation big hit A or the 2R probability variation big hit B is achieved in the first mission mode according to (p1) to (p3). A display similar to the above display is performed. In this case, since the winning change mode is entered after the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice, at the end of the big winning gaming state, the same probability change as in the above (e4) is performed by (p4). The mode is displayed. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. Then, the state as shown in (p4) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  Regarding the 15R normal big hit when the secondary re-lottery display is performed without the primary re-lottery display in the second mission mode, the primary re-lottery display is displayed in the first mission mode according to (q1) to (q4). A display similar to the display (k1) to (k4) which is performed when the 15R normal big hit when the secondary re-lottery display is performed without being performed is performed. Then, as shown in (q5), after the big hit end display indicating that the big hit gaming state is finished, the display in the normal mode as shown in (q6) is performed, and the fluctuation display in the normal mode is performed. It will be. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started.

  As described above, in the first mission mode and the second mission mode, the effects of the variable display and the effects in the big hit gaming state are the same effects, so for the player, the current mission mode It is difficult to distinguish whether the mission is in a low-accuracy low-base state or a high-accuracy low-base state.

  Next, a display example in the probability variation mode will be described. FIG. 40 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, or small hit in the probability variation mode.

  In the probability variation mode, when 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, or small hit, in the display state in the probability variation mode as shown in (r1), after the fluctuation display is started, as shown in (r2) The stop display results of the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol 93 become the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variable big hit display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes the 2R probability variable big hit A display result. “7”, “9” as the 2R probability variation big hit B display result, or “0” as the small hit display result. In this case, the probability variation mode is maintained after the end of the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice, so that the probability variation mode continues as shown in (r3). Is displayed, it is notified that the probability variation mode is continued. After that, when the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends, as shown in (r4), the display mode of the character 901 is continued in a display mode for specifying that the probability variation mode is in effect. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (r4) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  Next, a display example in the time reduction mode will be described. FIG. 41 is a display screen diagram showing a display example of 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B and a small hit display example in the time reduction mode.

When 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B is achieved in the time reduction mode, after the variable display is started in the display state in the time reduction mode such as (s1), as shown in (s2), the left symbol 91, The stop display result of the middle symbol 92 and the right symbol 93 becomes the chance of “135” as the 2R probability variation big hit display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes “7” or 2R as the 2R probability variation big hit A display result. The probability variation big hit B display result is “9”. In this case, since the game shifts to the probability change mode after the end of the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice, a message indicating that the probability change mode is entered is displayed as shown in (s3). Thus, it is notified that the probability variation mode is started. Thereafter, when the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened twice, as shown in (s4), a display mode (for example, a display indicating that the message “probability change” is displayed by the character specifying the probability change mode. A display in which the character 901 of the aspect) appears instead of the character 907 is performed.
If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (s4) is continued until the probability variation mode ends, and in such a state, the variation display in the probability variation mode is performed.

  When a small hit is made in the probability variation mode, after the variable display is started in the display state in the probability variation mode such as (t1), as shown in (t2), the left symbol 91, the middle symbol 92, and the right symbol The stop display result of the symbol 93 becomes the chance of “135” as the small hit display result, and the stop display result of the special symbol 81 becomes “0” as the small hit display result. Then, as shown in (t3), for example, a message indicating that the time reduction mode is continued, such as “Continue to Chance Time!”, Is displayed to notify that the time reduction mode is continued. Then, as shown in (t4), the remaining variable display count 906 in the time reduction mode is displayed, and the display mode of the character 907 is continued in a display mode that specifies that the mode is in the time reduction mode. If the next variable display can be started (when there is pending storage data), the variable display is started. The state as shown in (t4) is continued until the time reduction mode ends, and in such a state, the variable display in the time reduction mode is performed.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. 42 and 43 show main processes executed by the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, The main processing after S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interruption prohibited (S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (S3). In S2, an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode that indicates the included address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (S4). By the process of S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state according to the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (S5). When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as a + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of S5 (that is, By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is on, the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the power-off signal again after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (S80). Check if it exists. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the clear signal is off, a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and then the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after a predetermined delay time. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the clear switch-on flag is set (S7). If the clear switch on flag is not set, data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. It is confirmed whether or not (S8). When power supply stops, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the power supply stop processing, that is, stores the control state at the time of power supply stop. It is determined that When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not being performed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined based on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process depending on the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the game control microcomputer 560 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (S9). Clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 560 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the processes of S10 to S14) that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped. To do.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 returns the game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. To do. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S92). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (such as a special symbol process flag), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S93), and proceeds to S15.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, etc. Accordingly, an initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  The game control microcomputer 560 sets the initial address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (S13), and issues an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents. Processing to transmit to the sub-board is executed (S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes random number circuit setting processing for initial setting of the random number circuits 503a and 503b (S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs settings in accordance with the random number circuit setting program 551 to make the random number circuits 503a and 503b update the value of R1.

  The game control microcomputer 560 sets a timer interrupt setting for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Processing is executed (S16). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S18). The game control microcomputer 560 disables the interrupt when the display random number update process is executed (S17), and enters the interrupt enable state when the display random number update process ends (S19). Note that the display random number is a random number for determining the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, and the display random number update processing is to update the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. It is processing. Specifically, in the display random number update process, the values of R3 to R5 and R7 described above are updated. In the present embodiment, the display random number update process in S18 is repeatedly performed during the interrupt waiting process surplus time after the interrupt process is executed every 2 msec until the next interrupt process is executed. Become.

  Note that when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed because the display random number update process is also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid doing so. That is, if the timer interrupt is generated during the processing of S18 and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, the continuity of the count value is impaired. There is. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the process of S18.

  As described above, the game store clerk and the like can easily perform the initial operation by starting the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, turning on the power switch) while the clear switch is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the random number circuit setting process (S15) in the main process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing random number circuit setting processing. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and from among the random number circuits 503a and 503b built in the game control microcomputer 560, A random number circuit used when executing a timer interrupt process including a game control process is set (S151). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores, in advance, predetermined information in the RAM 55 for specifying the random number circuit 503 used when executing the timer interrupt process set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is memorized in the area. Then, the CPU 56 selects either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b in accordance with the designation information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, and the selected random number circuit is executed when the timer interrupt process is executed. Set as the random number circuit to be used. Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer makes a jackpot determination based on the random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, and determines the jackpot type and jackpot symbol based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. You may do it.

  When the random number circuit 503 used in S151 is set, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the operation of the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524, for example, so that the counter 521 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used. Does not update the count value C. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the count value C of the counter 521 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used, but the game control microcomputer 560 does not output the output control signal SC. The random number value storage circuit 531 may be controlled so as not to read the random number. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 prevents the random value fetch data “01h” from being written in the random value fetch register 539 of the random number circuit that is set not to use the latch control signal generation circuit 533. However, the latch signal SL may be controlled not to be output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  As described above, by setting the random number circuit 503 to be used, it is possible to appropriately set the range of random number values to be generated. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when a big hit determination is performed using a determination value including a determination value including “1” and “100” as a determination value for a big hit, the big hit is determined with a predetermined big hit probability (for example, 1/100). In this case, the number of types of determination values to be processed is smaller when the random number by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is used than when the random number by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, and the game control microcomputer 560 is used. The control burden is reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number maximum value setting module 551a included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and stores random number maximum value setting data for specifying a random number maximum value preset by the user as a random number maximum value setting register. Write to 535 (S152). By doing so, the random number maximum value of R1 preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503. When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the random number maximum value (any value from “0” to “4095”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the maximum random number value (any value from “0” to “65535”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  In this embodiment, when “0” to “255” are set as the random number maximum value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later. Even when control is performed to write a value greater than “256” as the random number maximum value, values “0” to “255” are set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 due to garbled data or the like. If this happens, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later.

  As described above, since the maximum value of the random number to be generated is set in advance in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in S152, a random number having a value larger than the range of random numbers used during the execution of the timer interrupt process is generated. And the processing load on the random number circuit 503 and the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 checks whether the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in S152 is not less than a predetermined lower limit value, and if the random number maximum value is not more than the lower limit value, the random number maximum value setting register 535 The random number maximum value resetting process is executed to reset the random number maximum value set to (S153).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the initial value changing module 551e included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and executes initial value changing processing for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 ( S154).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number update method selection module 551b included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number update method selection data into the random number update method selection register 540 (S155). By doing so, the random number update method of the random number circuit 503 is set. It is assumed that the CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “10h” into the random number update method selection register 540. That is, in this embodiment, the second random number update method is set as the random number update method of the random number circuit 503.

  In addition, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the cycle setting module 551c included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and sets cycle setting data (what is the reference clock signal) that specifies the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user. Data for setting whether to divide frequency) is written to the cycle setting register 537 (S156). By doing so, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (S157). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance by the user a set value indicating whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. And stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Whether the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value according to a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55. Set whether or not. When determining that the initial value input to the counter 521 is updated in S157, the CPU 56 indicates that the initial value is updated when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (when a notification signal is input from the counter 521). Set the initial value update flag shown.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (S158). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a set value indicating whether or not to change the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value according to a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55. Set whether or not to do. If the CPU 56 determines in S158 that the count value permutation output by the counter 521 is to be changed, the CPU 56 sets a count value permutation change flag indicating that the count value permutation is changed when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value. set. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the count value permutation change flag is set in S158 according to a predetermined set value. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number circuit activation data “80h” into the random number circuit activation register 541 (S159). By doing so, the game control microcomputer 560 activates the random number circuit 503.

  Next, the random number maximum value resetting process (S153) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the random number maximum value resetting process. In the random number maximum value resetting process, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 (S153a). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when executing the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  The game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the read random number maximum value is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (S153b). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, the maximum random number value that can be set in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is from “256” to “4095”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from is lower limit value “256” or less. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, the maximum random number that can be set in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is from “256” to “65535”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from the register 535 is equal to or lower than the lower limit “256”.

  If the read random number maximum value is less than or equal to the lower limit value, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 to a predetermined value (S153c). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit value “256”, the CPU 56 The random number maximum value set in 535 is reset to the predetermined value “4095”. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit value “256”, the CPU 56 The random number maximum value set in the setting register 535 is reset to the predetermined value “65535”.

  As described above, when the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is equal to or smaller than the predetermined lower limit value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value. For this reason, an excessively small value may be set as the maximum random number due to malfunction of the game control microcomputer 560 or an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a random number having an excessively small value range from the minimum value to the maximum value is generated.

  Next, the initial value changing process (S154) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the initial value changing process. In the initial value changing process, the CPU 56 first reads the initial value changing method selection data stored in the area 1F97h in the user program execution data area, and specifies the initial value changing method selected by the user. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the read initial value changing method selection data is “01h” (S154a), thereby specifying the initial value changing method selected by the user.

  When the value of the initial value change method selection data is “01h”, the CPU 56 sets the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 to a value set based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560. Change (S154b). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In S154b, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. Further, for example, in S154b, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, the ID number (for example, “100”)) and sets the predetermined value (for example, “100”). The initial value of the count value is set to the calculated value (for example, “200”) obtained by addition. When the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag indicating that the initial value of the count value has been changed (S154c).

  The game control microcomputer 560 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503 when changing the initial value input to the counter 521 in S154b, and sets it based on the ID number. It is determined whether the obtained value is equal to or greater than the maximum random number. If it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the game control microcomputer 560 does not change the initial value input to the counter 521 (for example, the initial value is “0”). Do not change). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  When the value of the initial value change method selection data is not “01h” in S154a (that is, the value of the initial value change method selection data stored in the area of address 1F97h in the user program execution data area is “00h”) ), The CPU 56 does not change the initial value of the count value, ends the initial value changing process as it is, and proceeds to S155.

  By executing the random number circuit setting process, various signals are input to the random number circuit 503 when the timer interrupt process including the game control process is performed, and various signals are generated in the random number circuit 503. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random number circuit 503 and the timing at which each signal is generated in the random number circuit 503.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the clock circuit 501 increases the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at predetermined intervals (timing T11, T21,... Shown in FIG. 47). A reference clock signal CLK (see FIG. 47A) is input to 503.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK supplied from the clock circuit 501 to generate a random number generation clock signal SI1 (see FIG. 47B). For example, the clock signal output circuit 524 raises the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at timings T11, T12,..., And changes the signal level from the high level to the low level at timings T21, T22,. To output a random number generating clock signal SI1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, for easy understanding, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK by two to generate the random number generating clock signal SI1. However, in an actual random number circuit, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is from “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”. Therefore, in an actual random number circuit, the clock signal output circuit 524 is set in the cycle setting register 537 in a range from “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 256”. The reference clock signal CLK is divided by a division ratio corresponding to the cycle setting data “07h” to “FFh” to generate a random number generating clock signal SI1. The random number generating clock signal SI 1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532.

  In this embodiment, since the second random number update method is set in the random number circuit setting process, the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 to the selector 528. When the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 selects the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs it to the counter 521. . Each time the rising edge of the random number generating clock signal SI1 supplied from the selector 528 is input, the counter 521 updates the count value C and outputs it to the count value permutation changing circuit 523.

  The inversion circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 (see FIG. 37C) by inverting the signal level of the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. For example, the inverting circuit 532 lowers the signal level of the output terminal from the high level to the low level at timings T11, T12,. As a result, the inverted clock signal SI2 is output. Further, the inverted clock signal SI <b> 2 generated by the inverting circuit 532 is output to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 milliseconds) elapses after the winning detection signal SS (see FIG. 47D) is input to the latch circuit generation circuit 533, the random number value read signal output circuit 526 generates a disturbance. A numerical reading signal is input. For example, when the signal level of the output terminal of the random number read signal output circuit 526 rises from a low level to a high level, the random value read signal is input to the latch signal generation circuit 533. The latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal input from the random value read signal output circuit 526 in response to the input of the second random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. A latch signal SL (see FIG. 47E) is output in synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 supplied from 532.

  As described above, the random number circuit 503 updates the count value C at the timings T11, T12, T13..., And outputs the latch signal SL at the timing T22 different from the timings T11, T12, T13. The random number value is stored in 531.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interruption occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, in the period when the interruption is permitted during the execution of the loop process of S17 to S19 in FIG. 43, the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. This timer interruption process is executed once every 2 msec, for example.

  In the timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 560 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) ( S101). Next, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state of these is determined ( Switch processing: S102). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether the initial value is updated when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see S157), and the random number is set. Processing for updating the initial value input to the counter 521 of the circuit 503 is performed (initial value updating processing: S103). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number used for the game control (random number update process: S104). Specifically, in the random number update process in S104, the values of R2 to R8 described above are updated.

  When the initial value update process and the random number update process are performed, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a count value permutation change process that causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503. (S105). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the count value permutation change process is determined depending on whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set in S158 of the random number circuit setting process. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a count value permutation change process based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a special symbol process (S106). In the special symbol process control, a corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. . The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Also, normal symbol process processing is performed (S107). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (decorative symbol command control process: S108). ). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variation display period) is the same.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes, for example, jackpot information (1 signal per jackpot to 3 signals per jackpot), start information (such as 1 signal for the number of symbols determined) supplied to the hall management computer, probability variation information (probability variation 1). Information output processing for outputting data such as signals, probability fluctuation 2 signals, etc.) is performed (S109).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, etc. (S110). Specifically, a payout command signal such as a prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on turning on the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like. . A payout control microcomputer (not shown) mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number signal indicating the number of prize balls.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (S111). In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be confirmed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, is executed (S112). Further, a solenoid output process (S113) is executed for instructing the output circuit 59 to drive various solenoids when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In order to switch the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 20 to the open state or the closed state, or to switch the game ball passage in the big winning opening, the solenoid circuit 33 switches the solenoids 71 to 73 according to the drive command. To drive.

  Next, a special symbol display control process is performed (S114). In the special symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display 8 is performed. Further, a normal symbol display control process is performed (S115). In the normal symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 is performed. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S116).

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. Further, the processing of S102 to S115 (excluding S109 and S112) corresponds to game control processing for controlling the progress of the game.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of counting the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed. Each time the game control microcomputer 560 executes the timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 560 counts up an interrupt number counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed. For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 completes the solenoid output process in S32, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value of an interrupt counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed.

  Also, for example, in the timer interrupt process, the switch process (S102), the decorative symbol command control process (S108), and the interrupt count process (counting the number of times the timer interrupt process described above is executed) are included in the game control process. Only the process) may be executed, and other processes in the game control process may be executed in the main process. In this case, in the loop process from S17 to S19 in the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the processes of S103 to S107 and S110 to S116 (except S112) among the game control processes (described above). Does not include interrupt count processing.

  In addition, when the CPU 56 detects that the timer interrupt count has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) after counting the interrupt count in the timer interrupt process as described above, the random number value from the random number circuit 503 is detected. Is read, and a random number read flag indicating that the random number read condition is satisfied is set. In the main process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the random number read flag is set during execution of a later-described start port switch passing process (S132) in the special symbol process (S106), and the random number read flag is set. If it is determined, the output control signal SC is output to the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503, and the value of R1 stored as the random value in the random value storage circuit 531 is read. Then, in the main process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to make a big hit based on the read random number value when executing a special symbol normal process (S140) described later in the special symbol process (S106). Become. This is performed so that the same random number value is not continuously read.

  Next, the initial value update process (S103) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the initial value update process. In the initial value update process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (S220). When it is detected that the notification signal is turned on, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the initial value update flag is set (S221). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the setting for updating the initial value is made when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see S157).

  When the initial value update flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. To do. If the initial value update flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the initial value change flag is set (S222). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the initial value of the count value is currently changed (that is, whether or not it is changed to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560).

  When the initial value change flag is set (that is, the initial value is currently changed to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560), the game control microcomputer 560 inputs the initial value to the counter 521. The value is returned to the original value (for example, “1”) from the value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (S223). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the initial value change flag (S224), and ends the initial value update process.

  When the initial value change flag is not set (that is, the initial value is not currently changed), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the initial value input to the counter 521 as the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. It changes to the value based on (S225). In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the initial value input to the counter 521 is calculated by adding a predetermined value “100” to the ID number “100”. Change to the value “200”. Further, for example, the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100”. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an initial value change flag (S226) and ends the initial value update process.

  When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, in S225, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the random number read from one random number circuit (for example, the 12-bit random number circuit 503a). An initial value input to the counter 521 may be obtained by adding the ID number as a predetermined value. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 may use the random number read from the other one (for example, the 16-bit random number circuit 503b) as the random number for determining the big hit.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 in S225, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503 and sets it based on the ID number. It is determined whether or not the obtained value is greater than or equal to the maximum random number. When it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the game control microcomputer 560 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521 with the predetermined value (for example, the predetermined value “ 0 ”is not updated). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If it is determined in S220 that the notification signal is in an off state, or if it is determined in S221 that the initial value update flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the initial value input to the counter 521. The initial value update process is terminated without any processing, and the process proceeds to S104.

  Next, the count value permutation change process (S105) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the count value permutation change process. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the count value permutation change process by executing the process according to the count value permutation change program 554. In the count value permutation changing process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (S241). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set (S242). That is, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 is set to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process ( Check S158).

  When the count value permutation change flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Judge to change. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536 (S243). That is, the game control microcomputer 560 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of the count values C input to the random value storage circuit 531 by writing the count value permutation change data “01h”.

  As described above, in the count value permutation changing process, when the random number is updated to a predetermined final value, the permutation of the count value updated by the counter 521 is changed, so that the randomness generated by the random number circuit 503 is more random. Can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 is initially set (random number circuit setting process) from the start of power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the timer interrupt is set. In the random number circuit setting process, a value based on an ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560 is set as an initial value of the random number. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved. In addition, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and a capture signal using a radio signal is generated for the pachinko gaming machine 1. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state such as the big hit state from being illegally established.

  In this embodiment, the inverting circuit 532 of the random number circuit 503 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 whose polarity is inverted, and outputs a latch signal for instructing storage of the random number in synchronization with the inverted clock signal SI2. . Therefore, the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number can be stored stably and reliably.

  Next, the special symbol process (S106) in the main process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the game control microcomputer 560. If the start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on, that is, the game ball is turned into the start winning opening 14 in the game control microcomputer 560. If a start winning to win a prize has occurred (S131), a start opening switch passing process (S132) is performed, and then any one of S140 to S147 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the start-port switch passing process of S132, it is confirmed whether the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (the number of stored storage) has reached the upper limit value, and the numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer is stored. If the number has not reached the maximum value, the count value of the reserved storage counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by one. The random number value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 extracts the numerical data of R1, the numerical data of the random counters R2 to R2 for determining the big hit type / hit symbol, and the numerical data of the random counters R8 to R8 for determining the small hit. Then, a process of storing them in a storage area corresponding to the extraction order of the hold storage buffer (corresponding to the value of the hold storage counter) is executed. Here, the extraction of the numerical value data of R1 from the random value storage circuit 531 is performed by inputting the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (S323) and stored as a random value in the random value storage circuit 531. This is done by reading the numerical data of R1. Thus, when the start port switch 62 is turned on and the number of numerical data stored in the holding storage buffer (the number of holding storage) has not reached the upper limit value, the condition for extracting the numerical data is satisfied. The extraction of numerical data (random numbers) means that a random number is read from a counter for generating the numerical data (random number) and the read random number is used as the value of the numerical data (random number).

  Special symbol normal processing (S140): A state in which special symbol variation display can be started (for example, since the symbol variation has not been made in the special symbol display 8 and the previous symbol variation in the special symbol display 8 has ended) Wait until the predetermined period has passed and the game is not in a big hit game. When the special symbol variation display can be started, the number of start winning memories is confirmed by confirming the count value of the holding memory counter for the special symbol. If the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is determined as a result of the variable display on the special symbol display 8. Further, when the big hit is not made, it is determined whether or not the small hit is made. A big hit flag is set for a big hit, and a small hit flag is set for a small hit. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S141.

  Special symbol stop symbol setting process (S141): The jackpot type and jackpot symbol are determined based on the extracted value of R2 for determining the jackpot type / hit symbol. Further, the determination of the small hit symbol and the determination of the off symbol based on the extracted value of R3 for determining the off symbol described above are performed. Furthermore, when a big hit is made, a process (decoration pattern information determination process) for determining predetermined information related to the variation display of the decoration symbol on the variation display device 9 is performed, and a symbol information command for designating information of the decoration symbol to be derived and displayed Is set. The symbol information command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S142.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S142): Extracting the value of the random counter R4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and using the data tables described with reference to FIGS. By selecting and determining the variation pattern to be executed from among the patterns, the variation pattern of variation display on the special symbol display 8 and the variation display device 9 is selected and determined.

  Also, after setting the variation display time (the time from the start of variation to the time when the display result is derived) for the variation display on the special symbol display 8 based on the variation pattern selected and determined in the special symbol process timer. Start the special symbol process timer. In addition, a drive signal for starting the special symbol variation display is set. The drive signal set here is output in S114 of FIG. In addition, a variation pattern command which is a command for instructing a variation pattern including information on the length of the variation display time of the decorative design is set. The variation pattern command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S143.

  Special symbol variation processing (S143): When the variation display time in the variation pattern selected and determined in the variation pattern setting processing elapses (the special symbol process timer set in S142 times out), the special symbol process flag is shifted to S144. Update as follows.

  Special symbol stop process (S144): Control is performed so that symbols that are variably displayed on each of the special symbol indicator 8 and the variable display device 9 are stopped. Specifically, a drive signal for stopping the special symbol is set. The drive signal set here is output in S114 of FIG. Then, a symbol stop command for stopping the decorative symbol is set. The symbol stop command set here is output to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. If the big hit flag is set, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S145. Otherwise, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S140.

  Pre-winner opening process (S145): Set data related to the control of the big win game state and the small hit game state, such as setting the execution time of the big win opening process in the special symbol process timer, and set the special symbol process flag Update to shift to S146.

  Processing for opening a big prize opening (S146): Confirming the establishment of the start conditions of each round in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, and performing the start processing of each round to open the big winning opening and starting the round Processing for transmitting an effect control command for displaying each round such as a command to the effect control board 80 is performed. Then, during each round, in-round processing such as management of the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening is performed. After that, it is confirmed that the end condition of each round in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied, a process for checking whether the big hit gaming state or the continuation condition of the small hit gaming state is satisfied is performed. Then, processing for transmitting a round end command to the effect control board 80 is performed. When confirming that the continuation condition is satisfied, for the 15R jackpot, whether or not the continuation condition for the jackpot gaming state is satisfied is monitored by monitoring whether or not the V winning switch 22 provided in the jackpot is passed. In the case of 2R probability variation big hit and small hit, it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied unconditionally. If the continuation condition is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the next round. Further, when the continuation condition of the big hit gaming state for 15R big hit is not satisfied, or when all rounds are finished for each of 15R big hit, 2R probability variable big hit and small hit, that is, when the hit gaming state ends. Processing for transmitting the above-mentioned ending display command is performed. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S147.

  Winning end process (S147): As display control when the small hit game state and the big hit game state are ended, control for causing the microcomputer 800 for effect control as described above to perform the ending display is performed. Then, the special symbol process flag is updated to shift to S140.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S140) in the special symbol process. This special symbol normal process is included in the display result determination program 552 described above. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the special symbol normal processing.

  First, the value of the hold storage counter is checked to determine whether or not the hold storage number is “0” (S21). The special symbol normal process is executed when the special symbol display unit 8 does not display the variation of the special symbol and is not in the big hit game. If the number of reserved storage is 0, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if the reserved memory number is not 0, each random number (numerical data) stored in the reserved memory buffer corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. At the same time (S22), the value of the reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the reserved storage counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (S23). That is, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To do. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the numbers of reserved memories are extracted always matches the order of the numbers of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3, and 4. . That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which the random numbers are extracted can be specified.

  Next, the big hit determination random number (the extracted data of R1) is read from the random number buffer area (S24), and the big hit determination process is executed (S25). In the big hit determination process, the following process is performed. First, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set. When the probability change flag is set (when the probability change state is entered, it is set in the special game process of FIG. 60 described later), the jackpot determination value used for the jackpot determination is preset as the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change. When the probability variation flag is not set, one value predetermined as a non-probability variation big hit determination value is set as the big hit determination value used for the big hit determination. Then, the jackpot determination random number read in S24 is compared with the jackpot determination value, and when the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value match, the jackpot determination is performed, and when these do not match, the jackpot determination is not determined. To do.

  As a result of the big hit determination process, when it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S26), the big hit flag is set (S31), and the process proceeds to S32 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined not to enter the big hit gaming state (N in S26), the small hit determination random number (the extracted data of R8) is read from the random number buffer area (S27), and the small hit determination processing is executed (S28). ). In the small hit determination process, the small hit determination random number read in S27 is compared with a predetermined small hit determination value, and when the small hit determination random number and the small hit determination value match, the small hit is determined. A decision is made, and when these do not match, a decision not to make a small hit (decision to be out of place) is made. As a result of the small hit determination process, when it is determined to be a small hit (Y in S29), the small hit flag is set (S30), and the process proceeds to S32 described later. On the other hand, as a result of the small hit determination process, when it is determined that the small hit is not made (N in S29), the process proceeds to S32.

  In S32, based on the state of the probability variation flag and the state of the time reduction flag, it is determined which state is the low accuracy low base, the high accuracy low base, the high accuracy high base, or the low accuracy base. A background image corresponding to the determined state is selected. Then, a setting (command set) for transmitting a background designation command indicating the selected background image is performed (S33). When the background designation command is set in this way, the background designation command is output in S108 of FIG. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (S141) (S34), and the process returns.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop symbol setting process (S141) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop symbol setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S40). When the big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (S45). When the small hit flag is set, a predetermined small hit symbol ("0") is determined as a special symbol stop symbol (S46). And it progresses to S48 mentioned later. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set, it is a time when the fluctuation display result is disregarded, a random number is extracted from R3, and a special symbol off symbol is determined based on the extracted value (S47). That is, based on the random number extracted from R3, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result is determined from among a plurality of even symbols. And it progresses to S48 mentioned later.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set in S41, it is extracted from R2 at the time of starting winning, and based on the extracted value of R2 read out in S22, 15R normal big hit, 15R positive variable big hit A, 15R positive variable big hit B, 2R positive variable big hit The type of jackpot that determines which type of jackpot gaming state is selected among A and 2R probability variable jackpot B, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type are determined (S41). Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined in S42 that the probability change big hit (any one of 15R probability change big hit B, 2R probability change big hit B, 2R probability change big hit A, and 2R probability change big hit B) is made (S42). ). When the probability variation big hit is determined, the probability variation big hit flag corresponding to the type of probability variation big hit (any one of 15R probability variation big hit A flag, 15R probability variation big hit B flag, 2R probability variation big hit A flag, and 2R probability variation big hit B flag) ) Is set (S43a), and the process proceeds to S44. Here, the probability variation jackpot flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined that the variation display performed in the variation display unit is a probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is not made, it is a time when it is decided that the normal big hit is made. Therefore, it is a flag indicating that the 15R normal big hit has been decided for the variable display performed in the variable display section. A big hit flag (15R normal big hit flag) is set (S43b), and the process proceeds to S44.

  In S44, a decorative symbol information determination process, which is a process for determining predetermined information related to the variable display of decorative symbols, is executed, and the process proceeds to S48. In this decorative symbol information determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not secondary re-lottery display is performed. When the secondary re-lottery display is performed, the secondary re-lottery flag is set as a flag indicating that the secondary re-lottery is executed. The details of the decorative symbol information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S48, processing for selecting a symbol information command to be transmitted is performed. Specifically, in S48, a symbol information command is selected as follows. When the off symbol is determined in S47, that is, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the above-described off designation command is selected as the symbol information command. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit designation command is selected as the symbol information command. When the big hit flag is set, the symbol information command is selected as follows. When none of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit flags is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is set, the 15R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery no finish designation command is selected.

  When the 15R probability variable big hit A flag or the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is not set, the 15R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery no designation command is selected. Also, when the 15R probability variable big hit A flag or the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is set, a command with a rise is selected after the 15R probability big hit / secondary re-lottery. . When the 2R probability variable big hit A flag or the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is not set, the 2R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery no designation command is selected.

  Next, a setting (command set) for transmitting the symbol information command selected in S48 is performed (S49). When the symbol information command is set in this way, the symbol information command is output in S108 of FIG. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S142) (S49), and the process returns.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol information determination process (S44) in the special symbol stop symbol setting process. In the decorative symbol information determination process, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether any of the 15R probability variation big hit A flag and the 15R probability variation big hit B flag is set. It is determined whether or not the determination is made (S51). If it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit has not been determined, the process proceeds to S55 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit has been determined, numerical data is extracted from R7, and whether or not the secondary re-lottery display is performed based on the extracted value as described above. A determination is made (S52). When it is determined that the secondary re-lottery display is not performed, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined to display the secondary re-lottery, the process proceeds to S54 described later.

  In S55, it is determined whether or not the variable display is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) by determining whether or not the 15R normal big hit flag is set. In the case of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the normal big hit is determined, the secondary re-lottery display must be performed as described above, so the process proceeds to S54 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal big hit is not determined (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit A or 2R probability variation big hit B is made), the process returns. In S54, the secondary re-lottery flag is set and the process returns. This indicates that the secondary re-lottery display is performed at the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S142) in the special symbol process. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the variation pattern setting processing.

  First, a variation pattern data table corresponding to the probability / base state is selected based on the state of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (S61). In other words, based on the state of the probability variation flag and the short-time flag, it is determined whether the current state is the probability / base state of low accuracy low base, high accuracy low base, high accuracy base, or low accuracy base. The variation pattern data table corresponding to the determined probability / base state is selected. For example, when it is determined that the low probability low base is based on the state of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, the low probability low base data table is selected as the variation pattern data table.

  Next, by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the variable display is a big hit (S62). When it is determined that the big hit is not determined, the process proceeds to S64 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is determined, the type of the big hit (the type is discriminated based on the big hit flag and the probability variation flag) is selected from the variation pattern data table selected in S61. A variation pattern data table is selected (S63), and the process proceeds to S68. For example, when the 15R normal big hit flag is set, it is a normal big hit, and the 15R normal big hit determination data table is selected.

  Further, when the process proceeds to S64, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the small display is made for the variable display by determining whether or not the small hit flag is set. When it is determined that the small hit is determined, the variation pattern data table used for determining the small hit is selected from the variation pattern data tables selected in S61 (S65), and the process proceeds to S68.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S64 that it is not determined to be a small hit, it is a time of losing, and a random number is extracted from R5, and reach determination is performed based on the extracted value (S66). The reach determination result in this case is stored as data such as a reach flag. Then, based on the reach determination result in S66, a change pattern data table to be used when determining the loss is selected from the change pattern data table selected in S61 according to the presence or absence of reach (S67), and the process proceeds to S68. For example, when it is determined that the reach is determined to be reach, the data table at the time of determination of reach divergence is selected, and when it is determined that the reach is not determined, the data table at the time of determination of non-reach is determined.

  In S68, a random number is extracted from R4, and a variation pattern is selected based on the extracted value using the variation pattern data table selected in S63, S65, and S67. In S68, when the variation pattern is selected, the presence / absence of the primary re-lottery display is selected and determined at the same time as described above. Next, an effect control mode display designation flag indicating the effect control mode designated by the variation pattern selected in S68 is set (S68a). Specifically, in S68a, an effect control mode display designation flag is set when “rear normal mode” is designated, and a time reduction mode display designation flag is set when “rear short mode” is designated. When the “probable change mode” is designated, the probability change mode display designation flag is set. When the “post mission mode” is designated, the mission mode display designation flag is set. Then, the special symbol display 8 performs a process for starting the variation display of the special symbol (S69). Specifically, a drive signal for starting the special symbol variation display is set on the special symbol display 8, and the drive signal is output in S114 of FIG. Then, a setting (command set) for transmitting a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in S68 is performed (S70). When the variation pattern command is set in this way, the variation pattern command is output in S108 of FIG. Based on the selected variation pattern, the special symbol display unit 8 sets the variation display time in the special symbol process timer, and then starts the special symbol process timer (S71). The special symbol process timer is a timer used for managing the variable display time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S143) (S72), and the process returns.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S144) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the following process.

  First, a process for stopping the special symbol variation display is performed (S80). Specifically, a drive signal for stopping the variation display of the special symbol for which the variation display is performed on the special symbol display 8 is set, and the drive signal is output in S114 of FIG. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol determined as described above. Further, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the symbol stop command is set in the pointer (S81). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol on the variation display device 9. The symbol stop command set in S81 is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. When receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control microcomputer 800 executes control for stopping the variation display of the decorative symbol on the variation display device 9 and deriving and displaying the display result.

  Next, whether or not the probability change flag is in the reset state and the time reduction flag is in the set state in order to determine whether or not it is in the high accuracy low base state in which the period of the time reduction state is limited. Is determined (S82). When the probability variation flag is reset and the time reduction flag is not set, that is, when the state is other than the high accuracy low base, the process proceeds to S86 described later. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is reset and the time reduction flag is set, that is, when the high accuracy low base state is set, "1" is subtracted from the time reduction counter (S83). Here, the time reduction counter is a counting means used for managing the duration of the time reduction state in the highly accurate low-base state. The hour / hour counter is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) in the high-accuracy low-base processing described later with reference to FIG. Is done.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S84). When the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S86 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the hour / hour counter is “0”, the termination condition for the hour / hour state is satisfied, so the hour / hour flag is reset to end the hour / hour state (S85), and the process proceeds to S86.

  In S86, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit flag is set. When the big hit flag is set in S86, that is, when the big hit flag is set in S26 in the special symbol normal processing (S140), the big hit type determined in S42 is started. Is set (command set) for transmitting a hit start command indicating (S87), and the process proceeds to S90 described later.

  In S87, specifically, a hit start command is selected as follows. When none of the probability variation big hit flags is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is set, the 15R normal big hit start / secondary re-lottery no finish designation command is selected. When the 15R probability variable big hit A flag or the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is not set, the 15R probability variable big hit start / secondary re-lottery designation command is selected. Also, when the 15R probability variable big hit A flag or the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is set, the command to specify that there is a rise after the start of the 15R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery is selected To do. If the 2R probability variable big hit A flag or the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set and the secondary re-lottery flag is not set, the 2R probability variable big hit start / secondary re-lottery designation command is selected.

  The hit start command set in S87 is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. When receiving the hit start command, the effect control microcomputer 800 performs display control according to the hit start command received by the variable display device 9.

  When the big hit flag is not set in S86, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (S88). When the small hit flag is set, a setting (command set) is set to transmit a small hit start / secondary re-lottery designation command which is a hit start command indicating that the small hit is started (S89). ), Go to S90. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set, the fluctuation display result is out of date, so the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S140) (S91), and the return To do. Also, in S90, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S145) (S90), and the process returns.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (S145). In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A flag or 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set to determine whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set (S450). When it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit is determined, the process proceeds to S454 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit is not determined (when 15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit A, 15R probability variable big hit B, or small hit is decided), the small hit flag By determining whether or not is set, it is determined whether or not the small hit is determined (S451).

  When it is not decided to make a small hit, that is, when it is decided to make a 15R normal big hit, a 15R probability variable big hit A, or a 15R probability variable big hit B, it is a time when repeated continuation control is performed for a maximum of 15 rounds. Therefore, the upper limit value data of the number of rounds is set to 15 (S452), the upper limit value data of the opening time of the big winning opening in each round is set to 30 seconds (S453), and the process proceeds to S456 described later. As a result, the upper limit number of rounds executed in the special winning opening opening process is 15, and the maximum open time in each round is 30 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is determined, the process proceeds to S454.

  In S454, the upper limit value data of the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is set to 2, and the upper limit value data of the opening time of the big prize opening at the opening times of each big winning opening is set to 1 second ( The process proceeds to S455) and S456. As a result, for each of the 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, and small hit, the upper limit number of rounds executed in the large winning opening opening process, that is, the number of opening of the large winning opening is two, The opening time at the opening of each big winning opening is 1 second.

  In S456, data necessary for controlling the big hit gaming state is set in addition to the upper limit value of the round number and the upper limit value of the opening time. As an example, the interval period between rounds in the jackpot gaming state is set by S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (S146) (S457), and the process returns.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (S146) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the following process.

  First, based on whether or not the opening operation of the second special variable winning ball device 20 corresponding to the second round of 2R probability variable big hit in the small hit gaming state is completed, whether or not it is at the end of the small hit gaming state Is determined (S160). If it is determined that the small hit gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to S180 described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not at the end of the small hit gaming state, the final round in the big hit gaming state set in the pre-opening process of the big winning opening (the upper limit number of rounds, 15R normal big hit and 15R probability change) 15 rounds for big wins, 2 rounds for 2R probability variable big hits), or the round is over without continuing the big hit gaming state, or the final round in the big hit gaming state set in the pre-opening process for the big prize opening Based on the completion, it is determined whether or not the big hit gaming state is over (S161). If it is determined that the big hit gaming state has ended, the process proceeds to S170 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not at the end of the big hit gaming state, it is determined whether or not the start condition of each round is satisfied (S162).

  In S162, for example, when the time from the start of the big hit gaming state is set to the start timing of the first round, or when the interval period between rounds in which the time is predetermined for each round ends. It is determined that the start condition for each round is satisfied when the predetermined start timing of each round is reached, as in

  When it is determined that the start condition for each round is not satisfied, the process proceeds to S165 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start condition of each round is satisfied, processing to be performed at the start of each round, such as opening the big prize opening, is executed (S163). Then, a setting (command set) for transmitting a round start command for each round (for example, a third round start command for the third round) is performed (S164). When the round start command is set in this way, the round start command is output in S108 of FIG. After S164, the process proceeds to S165.

  In S165, it is determined whether or not each round is in a round state that is a state other than at the start of the round and at the end of the round. If it is in a round state, for example, processing performed during each round, such as counting the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening during the round, is executed (S166), and the process proceeds to S167. On the other hand, if not in a round state, the process proceeds to S167 as it is.

  In S167, it is determined whether or not the end condition of each round is satisfied. In S167, for example, when there is a predetermined number (10) of prizes in the big prize opening during the round as described above, or the big prize opening time set in the above-mentioned pre-opening process for the big prize opening It is determined that the end condition of each round is satisfied when the predetermined end timing of the round is reached, such as when the earlier one of the conditions when the upper limit value has passed is satisfied.

  In S167, when it is determined that the end condition of each round is not satisfied, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition of each round is satisfied, each of the cases such as closing the big prize opening and confirming whether the condition for continuing the big hit gaming state to the next round is satisfied, etc. Processing performed at the end of the round is executed (S168). When confirming that the continuation condition is satisfied, for the 15R jackpot, whether or not the continuation condition for the jackpot gaming state is satisfied is monitored by monitoring whether or not the V winning switch 22 provided in the jackpot is passed. In the case of 2R probability variation big hit and small hit, it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied unconditionally. Then, a setting (command set) for transmitting a round end command for each round (for example, a third round end command for the third round) is performed (S169). When the round end command is set in this way, the round end command is output in S108 of FIG. After S169, the process returns.

  As described above, when it is determined in S161 that the big hit gaming state is ended, an ending display command for designating the contents of the ending display performed at the end of the big hit gaming state is selected (S170).

  Next, a command selection method in S170 will be described. First, when any of the 2R probability variable big hit A flag, 2R probability variable big hit B flag, and small hit flag is not set, that is, among 15R normal big hit, 15R accurate big hit A, and 15R accurate big hit B When either of these occurs, the command is selected as follows. When the secondary re-lottery flag is set and the above-described normal mode display designation flag is set, the no-after-secondary lottery / normal mode display designation command is selected. When the secondary re-lottery flag is set and the above-mentioned time-short mode display designation flag is set, the no finish after time-second re-lottery / short-time mode display designation command is selected. When the secondary re-lottery flag is set and the above-described probability variation mode display designation flag is set, the completion after the second re-lottery / probability variation mode display designation command is selected. When the secondary re-lottery flag is set and the above-described mission mode display designation flag is set, the completion after the secondary re-lottery / mission mode display designation command is selected.

  When the secondary re-lottery flag is not set and the probability change mode display designation flag is set, the no secondary re-lottery / probability change mode display designation command is selected. When the secondary re-lottery flag is not set and the mission mode display designation flag is set, the no secondary re-lottery / mission mode display designation command is selected.

  Next, when the 2R probability variation big hit A flag or the 2R probability variation big hit B flag is set, that is, when the 2R probability variation big hit B flag is reached, the command is selected as follows. When the probability variation mode display designation flag is set, the 2R probability variation big hit end display / probability variation mode display designation command is selected. When the mission mode display designation flag is set, the 2R probability change big hit end display / mission mode display designation command is selected.

  Then, a setting (command set) for transmitting the ending display command selected in S170 is performed (S171). The ending display command set in S171 is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG.

  Next, based on determining whether or not the secondary re-lottery flag is set, it is determined whether or not the secondary re-lottery display is performed (S172). When it is determined that the secondary re-lottery display is to be performed, a predetermined time at which the secondary re-lottery display is performed is set in the hit end timer which is a timer for managing the hit end display as the ending display As a result, the winning end timer is started (S173), and the big hit end display corresponding to the secondary re-lottery display is started (S174). Here, the time set in the hit end timer when the secondary re-lottery display is performed is the time set in the hit end timer when the big hit normal end display which is the 15R big hit end display without the secondary re-lottery display is performed. The time is set longer than the set time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the hit end process (S147) (S184), and the process returns.

  If it is determined in S172 that the secondary re-lottery display is not performed, whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state is ended based on checking whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit flag is set. Is determined (S175). When it is determined that it is not the end of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state, that is, when the big hit normal end of the 15R probability variable big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the secondary re-lottery display is always performed at the time of 15R normal big hit. Therefore, in the case of 15R big win, the secondary re-lottery display is not performed at the time of 15R probability variable big hit), and a predetermined time when the big hit normal end display is performed is set in the hit end timer As a result, a hit end timer is started (S176), and a big hit end display corresponding to the big hit normal end display is started (S177). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the hit end process (S147) (S184), and the process returns.

  On the other hand, when it is determined at S175 that the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state is ended, the chance hit end display (for example, the display of the effect control mode after the hit ends when the 2R probability variable big hit ends at the hit end timer (described above) In this way, when a 2R probability variation big hit is made, the secondary re-lottery display is not performed). By setting a predetermined time when a predetermined time is set, the hit end timer is started (S178). Start (S179). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the hit end process (S147) (S184), and the process returns.

  Further, in S180, which proceeds when it is determined that the small hit gaming state is ended by S160 described above, an ending display command for designating the contents of the ending display performed at the end of the small hit gaming state is selected (S180).

  Next, the command selection method in S180 will be described. When the time reduction mode display designation flag is set, the small hit end display / time reduction mode display designation command is selected. When the probability variation mode display designation flag is set, the small hit end display / probability variation mode display designation command is selected. When the mission mode display designation flag is set, the small hit end display / mission mode display designation command is selected.

  Then, a setting (command set) for transmitting the ending display command selected in S180 is performed (S181). The ending display command set in S181 is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in S108 of FIG. Then, the hit end timer is started by setting a predetermined time when the hit end display is performed when the hit end timer is displayed. S182), the display at the end of chance chance is started (S183). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the hit end process (S147) (S184), and the process returns.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the hit end process (S147) in the special symbol process. In the winning end process, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the following process.

  First, as described above, the hit end timer whose time has been set is subtracted and updated (S191). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit end timer has timed out (value has become “0”) (S192). If it is determined that the hit end timer has not timed out, the process returns. As a result, the hit end timer counts the hit end display by updating the subtraction every time the hit end process is executed. On the other hand, when the hit end timer times out, a special game process, which is a process for managing the probability / base state including the probability variation state as the special game state, is performed (S193). The processing content of the special game processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. Then, a flag (hit flag) related to the hit such as the big hit flag, 15R probability variable big hit flag, 2R probability variable big hit flag, and small hit flag is reset (S194), and the special symbol process flag value is processed in the special symbol normal processing ( The value is updated to a value corresponding to S140) (S195), and the process returns.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special game process (S193) in the hit end process. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the special game processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S501). When it is determined that the probability variation flag is set, the process proceeds to S505 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S502).

  If it is determined that the hourly flag is not set, both the probability variation flag and the hourly flag are not set, so it is determined that the low-accuracy low-base state is present, and the low Probability base processing is executed (S503). Then return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hour / short flag is set, the probability variable flag is not set and the hour / hour flag is set. A low-accuracy base process for management is executed (S504). Then return.

  If it is determined that the probability variation flag is set and the process proceeds to S505, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set. When it is determined that the hour / short flag is set, both the probability variation flag and the hour / short flag are set, so it is determined that the state is a highly accurate and high base state, and a high The accurate base processing is executed (S506). Then return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / short flag is not set, the probability variable flag is set and the hour / hour flag is not set. The highly accurate and low base processing is executed (S507). Then return.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the low probability base process (S503) in the special game process. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the low-accuracy and low-base processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a 15R normal big hit flag is set by determining whether or not a 15R normal big hit flag is set (S701). When it is determined that 15R is usually a big hit, the process returns. As a result, when the 15R normal big hit is achieved in the low-probability / low-base state, the low-probability / low-base state is continued without changing the probability / base state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 15R normal big hit is not made, it is judged whether or not the 15R probability big hit A flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the 15R probability big hit A is set (S702).

  When it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit A is not set, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit B is set (S703). When it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit B is not set, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A is set (S704). When it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit A is not set, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set, thereby determining whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit B is set (S705).

  When it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit A is determined by S702, when it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit B is determined by S703, and when it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit B is determined by S705, the probability variation flag is set. (S706), the reset state of the time reduction flag is maintained (S707), and the process returns. As a result, in the state of low probability and low base, when the probability is 15R probability variation big hit A, 15R probability variation big hit B, or 2R probability variation big hit B, the probability / base state is high probability low base as shown in FIG. Transition to the state.

  If it is determined in S704 that the 2R probability change big hit A has been made, the probability change flag is set (S708), the time reduction flag is set (S709), and the process returns. As a result, when the 2R probability variation big hit A is obtained in the low probability low base state, the probability / base state shifts to the high probability high base state as shown in FIG. If it is determined in S705 that the 2R probability variation big hit B is not made, that is, if the small hit is made, the process returns. As a result, when a small hit is made in the low probability low base state, the probability / base state is continued as it is in the low probability low base state as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the high-precision low-base processing (S507) in the special game processing. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the high-accuracy and low-base processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not the 15R normal big hit flag is set by determining whether or not the 15R normal big hit flag is set (S711). When it is determined that the 15R normal big hit has been determined, the probability variation flag is reset (S716), the hour / hour flag is set (S717), the hour / hour counter is further set (S718), and the process returns. As a result, when the 15R normal big hit is achieved in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability / base state shifts to the low accuracy and high base state, and counting of the number of variable displays by the time reduction counter is started.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the 15R normal big hit is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability big hit A flag is set by determining whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit A flag is set. Judgment is made (S712). When it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit A is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set by determining whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set. (S713). When it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit B is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A flag is set by determining whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A flag is set. (S714). When it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit A is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set by determining whether the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set. (S715).

  When it is determined in S712 that it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit A, when it is determined in S714 that it is determined to be 2R probability variation big hit A, and S715 is determined to be 2R probability variation big hit B. When it is determined that there is, the probability variation flag is set (S719), the time reduction flag is set (S720), and the process returns. As a result, in the state of high accuracy and low base, when the probability is 15R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit A, or 2R probability variation big hit B, as shown in FIG. The state is shifted to (S705).

  If it is determined in S713 that the 15R probability variation big hit B has been determined, the process returns. As a result, when the 15R probability variation big hit B is obtained in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability / base state is continued in the highly accurate and low base state as shown in FIG. If it is determined in S715 that the 2R probability variable big hit B has not been determined, that is, if the small hit has been determined, the routine returns. As a result, when a small hit is made in the highly accurate and low base state, the highly accurate and low base state is continued with the probability and base state as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the high-accuracy base process (S506) in the special game process. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the high-accuracy base-based processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not the 15R normal big hit flag is set by determining whether or not the 15R normal big hit flag is set (S721). When it is determined that 15R has been determined to be a big hit, the probability variation flag is reset (S722), the set state of the hour / hour flag is maintained (S723), the hour / hour counter is further set (S724), and the process returns. . As a result, when the 15R normal big hit is achieved in the high-accuracy base state, the probability / base state shifts to the low-accuracy base state as shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the 15R normal big hit has not been determined, the process returns. As a result, in the state of high accuracy and high base, when any of the 15R accuracy variation big hit A, 15R accuracy variation big hit B, 2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, and small hit, the probability as shown in FIG. The base state is continued in a highly accurate base state.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a low-accuracy base process (S504) in the special game process. The game control microcomputer 560 performs the following processing in the low-accuracy base processing.

  First, by determining whether or not the 15R normal big hit flag is set, it is determined whether or not the 15R normal big hit is determined (S731). When it is determined that the 15R normal big hit has been determined, the probability variation flag reset state is maintained (S736), the hour / hour flag is reset (S737), the hour / hour counter is further reset (S738), and the process returns. . As a result, when the 15R normal big hit is achieved in the low-accuracy base state, the probability / base state shifts to the low-accuracy / low-base state as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the 15R normal big hit is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability big hit A flag is set by determining whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit A flag is set. Judgment is made (S732). When it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit A is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set by determining whether or not the 15R probability variable big hit B flag is set. (S733). When it is determined that the 15R probability variable big hit B is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A flag is set by determining whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit A flag is set. (S734). When it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit A is not determined, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set by determining whether the 2R probability variable big hit B flag is set. (S735).

  When it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit A is determined in S732, and when it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit B is determined in S733, it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit A is determined in S734. When the determination is made and when it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit B is determined in S735, the probability variation flag is set (S739), and the state of setting the time reduction flag is maintained (S740). To do. As a result, in the state of low probability and low base, when the probability becomes 15R probability variation big hit A, 15R probability variation big hit B, 2R probability variation big hit A, or 2R probability variation big hit B, the probability / base state becomes as shown in FIG. Transition to a high-accuracy base state.

  If it is determined in S735 that the 2R probability variable big hit B has not been determined, that is, if the small hit is determined, the process returns. As a result, when a small hit is made in the low-accuracy base state, the low-accuracy base state is continued with the probability / base state as it is, as shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 800 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 800. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like (S201).

  When the initialization process is completed, the production control microcomputer 800 monitors the timer interrupt flag (S202). When a timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 800 sets “1” as the value of the timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If “1” is set as the value of the timer interrupt flag in S202, the effect control microcomputer 800 clears the value of the timer interrupt flag (S203), and executes the following effect control process.

  A timer interrupt occurs every 33 ms, for example. That is, the effect control process is activated every 33 ms, for example. Further, in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment, only the process of setting “1” as the value of the timer interrupt flag is performed, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process, but the timer interrupt process The effect control process may be executed.

  In the effect control process, first, a power-off process for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output is executed (S204). Next, command analysis processing for analyzing the received effect control command is executed (S205). Next, effect control process processing is performed (S206). The contents of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and effect control including display control of the variable display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a predetermined random counter is executed (S207). In the random number updating process, for example, various random counters such as the above-described random counter RT for determining the production contents and random counters RU-1 to RU3 for determining the decorative symbols to be stopped are updated. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in S202. An INT signal for effect control from the main board 31 is input to the interrupt terminal of the effect control microcomputer 800. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, an INT interrupt is generated in the production control microcomputer 800. Then, the effect control microcomputer 800 executes effect control command reception processing in the interrupt processing. In the effect control command reception process, the effect control microcomputer 800 stores the received effect control command data in a command reception buffer provided in the RAM 85.

  Next, the command analysis processing in S205 of FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.

  In the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not there is a reception command in the command reception buffer (S211). If there is no reception command, the process returns. On the other hand, when there is a reception command, the reception command is read (S212). The command data read here is erased in the command reception buffer. Then, it is determined whether or not the read reception command is the symbol information command described above (S213). If it is a symbol information command, the symbol information data indicated by the symbol information command is stored in the symbol information storage area provided in the RAM 85 (S214). Next, when the received symbol information command indicates information on the big hit or information on the big hit, information on the big hit indicated by the symbol information command (15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit A, 15R probability big hit B, 2R) Information on probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B, etc.) or small hit is stored in the hit information storage area provided in RAM 85 (S215). Then, in response to the received command, a symbol information reception flag that is a reception flag that can identify the received command is set (S216). Then, secondary re-lottery information (presence / absence of secondary re-lottery, presence / absence of completion, etc.) that is information about the secondary re-lottery display indicated by the received symbol information command is stored in the secondary re-lottery information provided in the RAM 85. Store in the area (S217), and return to S211.

  In addition, in S214, the symbol information data indicated by the symbol information command is stored, and in S215 and S217, the symbol information data is stored separately as information about the big hit and information about the secondary re-lottery display. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if there is data of either S214, S215, or S217, it is possible to specify the data of the symbol information indicated by the received symbol information. Therefore, S214, S215, and S217 are possible. The symbol information data may be stored in either of the cases. In addition, since the symbol information reception flag can identify the received symbol information command, when the contents of the command can be identified based on the received symbol information command, the above-described S214, S215, and S217 are: It does not have to be provided. On the other hand, if the type of the received symbol information command can be specified based on the information stored in S214, S215, and S217, S216 need not be provided.

  If it is determined in S213 that the command is not a symbol information command, it is determined whether or not the read received command is a variation pattern command (S218). If it is a variation pattern command, the data specifying the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is stored in a variation pattern data storage area provided in the RAM 85 (S219). Then, in response to the received command, a variation pattern reception flag that is a reception flag that can identify the received command is set (S220), and the process returns to S211. Since the fluctuation pattern reception flag can identify the received fluctuation pattern command, if the contents of the command can be identified based on the received fluctuation pattern command, the above-described S219 may not be provided. Good. Conversely, when it is possible to identify the type of the received variation pattern command based on the information stored in S219, S220 need not be provided.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the read reception command is the hit start command (S221). If it is a hit start command, a hit start command reception flag, which is a reception flag capable of specifying the received command, is set corresponding to the received command (S222). As the hit information, information about the big hit (15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit A, 15R positive variable big hit B, 2R positive variable big hit A, 2R positive variable big hit B information, etc.) or small hit information as the hit information Is stored in the hit information storage area provided in the RAM 85 separately from the aforementioned S215 (S223). Next, information on the secondary re-lottery display indicated by the received winning start command (presence / absence of secondary re-lottery, presence / absence of completion, etc.) is stored in the secondary re-lottery information storage area provided in the RAM 85 in S217 described above. (S224) and the process returns to S211. Since the hit start command reception flag can identify the received hit start command, the above-described S223 and S224 are provided when the contents of the command can be specified based on the received hit start command. It does not have to be. Conversely, if it is possible to identify the type of the received hit start command based on the information stored in S223 and S224, S222 may not be provided.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the read reception command is the above-mentioned ending display command (S225). If it is an ending display command, data indicating the type of ending display indicated by the ending display command is stored as ending information in an ending display data storage area provided in the RAM 85 (S226). Then, in response to the received command, an ending display reception flag that is a reception flag that can identify the received command is set (S227), and the process returns to S211. Note that since the ending display reception flag can identify the received ending display command, if the contents of the command can be identified based on the received ending display command, the aforementioned S226 may not be provided. Good. Conversely, if the type of the received ending display command can be specified based on the information stored in S226, S227 need not be provided.

  If it is determined in S225 that the received command is not an ending display command, it is determined whether or not the other received command is a background designation command (S228). If it is a background designation command, a background designation command reception flag, which is a reception flag capable of specifying the received command, is set corresponding to the received command (S229), and the process returns to S211.

  When it is determined in S228 that the received command is not a background designation command (when the command is other than the above-mentioned various commands), it is determined what other received command is, and the received command is The corresponding command reception flag is set (S230), and the process returns to S211. That is, S230 collectively shows processing corresponding to reception of various commands other than the above-described symbol information command, hit start command, variation pattern command, ending display command, and background designation command.

  Next, the effect control process according to S206 in FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the effect control process. In the effect control process, any one of S400 to S406 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S400): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received. When it is confirmed that a variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S401. To do.

  Symbol variation start processing (S401): With regard to the variation display of the decorative symbol, the combination of the off symbol, the combination of the jackpot symbol, the display result of the chance, the combination of the temporary stop symbol before the first re-lottery display, the variation display before the jackpot game The combination of the jackpot symbol as a result and the stop symbol of the variable display such as the display result of the secondary re-lottery display are determined. Then, according to the variation pattern command, a variation pattern to be actually used for variation display on the variation display device 9 is determined from a plurality of predetermined variation patterns of decorative symbols as described above. Further, the variation display time is set according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation of the decorative symbols (left, middle, right symbol) in the variation display device 9 is started. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S402. The contents of the symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Symbol variation processing (S402): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed, etc.) constituting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol on the variation display device 9 and monitors the end of the set variation time. Then, when the set fluctuation time is over, the left, right, and middle symbols of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and control is performed so as to change to a fluctuation variation state in which the symbols are shaking without confirming the display result. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S403. The contents of the process during symbol variation will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Symbol stop waiting process (S403): If the symbol stop command for instructing all symbol symbols to stop is received after the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has passed, the variation display device 9 performs the variation of the ornament symbol. Control is performed to stop (stop the above-described shaking fluctuation state) and display a stop symbol. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol stop symbol on the variable display device 9 is a hit (including big hit, small hit) display result, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S404, and the variable display device 9 is updated. When the stop design of the decorative design at is a display result, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S400.

  Winning display processing (S404): After the decorative symbol changing time on the changing display device 9, the display at the start of the big hit and the start of the small hit is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S405.

  Process during winning game (S405): Control is performed to display an effect during winning game, which is a display for performing effects during the winning game state including effects during the big hit gaming state and effects during the small hit gaming state. For example, various effects during each round in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, and various effects during the interval period between each round are displayed for performing in the big hit gaming state and during the small hit gaming state. Executed. Then, when the winning game process is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to S406. The contents of the hit game processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Winning game end process (S406): Ending display is performed as an effect when the winning game state including the big hit game state and the small hit game state is ended. In the ending display, a big hit normal end display which is a display for ending the 15R probability variable big hit gaming state without performing the second re-lottery display, and a 15R normal big hit gaming state or a 15R positive variable big hit game after performing the second re-lottery display. A chance to be displayed at the end of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state without the secondary re-lottery display, and at the end of the small hit gaming state, which is a display to end the state, corresponding to the secondary re-lottery corresponding big hit end display The display at the end of a hit is included. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to S400.

  Next, the symbol variation start process in S401 of FIG. 67 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the symbol variation start process (S401) of FIG. In the symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 800 performs the following process.

  First, with respect to decorative symbols, combinations of missing symbols, combinations of temporary stop symbols before the first re-lottery display, combinations of jackpot symbols as variable display results before jackpot game, 2R probability variation jackpot display results, and A display result determination process is performed to determine the display result of the variable display such as the display result of the small hit chance (S261). The processing content of the display result determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the symbol data determined in the display result determination process is stored in the determined symbol data storage area provided in the RAM 85 (S262).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the mode is the time reduction mode (S263). When it is determined that the time reduction mode is set, the shortening counter is updated by subtracting “1” (S264), and the process proceeds to S265. Thereby, in the time reduction mode, the number of executions of variable display is counted by the shortening counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is not the time-saving mode, the process proceeds to S265 as it is. In S265, it is determined whether or not the effect command for which the current variable display is started in response to reception specifies that the game is a big hit, a small hit, or a chance is off (S265). ).

  When it is determined in S265 that the game mode is designated, a game state management process (S266) for managing the control mode is executed, and then the process proceeds to S268 described later. If it is determined in S265 that it has not been specified, it is determined whether or not the mission mode is in either the first mission or the second mission (S267). When it is determined that it is the mission mode, the process proceeds to S273 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is not the mission mode, the process proceeds to S268. In S268, data for performing a variation display with a variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set. Specifically, in S268, the variation pattern is set by selecting and setting data used for variation display in the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern command. For example, when a 15R jackpot occurs during the mission performance period, it is necessary to perform an effect that the mission has achieved, such as displaying the character X as described above. Setting of data for performing such an effect is as follows. Performed in S268. More specifically, when a big hit occurs during the mission performance period, it is determined whether or not the first mission mode flag or the second mission mode flag is set at the stage before executing S266, and these flags are used. When it is determined that the mode is the mission mode, a mission achievement effect flag indicating that the mission achievement effect is performed is set. In S268, when the mission achievement effect flag is set, display data for performing the effect achieved by the mission is set. In S268, for example, when the second mission mode is entered after the chance is lost, the type of mission to be executed is confirmed based on the mission type flag set in the gaming state management process of FIG. 70 described later. Then, after the variable display is completed, display data for performing a mission effect such as a display for specifying the mission content is set according to the type of mission to be executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the mode is the time reduction mode (S269). When it is determined that the mode is not the time reduction mode, the process proceeds to S286 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is the time reduction mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the shortening counter has become “0” (S270). When it is determined that the value of the shortening counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S286 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the abbreviated counter is “0”, the time-short mode flag is set because the time-short mode end condition is satisfied by performing a variable display that deviates a predetermined number of times in the time-short mode. Reset (S271). Then, the normal mode flag is set according to the end of the time reduction mode (S272), and the process proceeds to S286 described later. As a result, the control mode shifts to the normal mode when the variable display that is a predetermined number of deviations is performed in the time reduction mode.

  If it is determined in S267 that the mission mode is selected and the process proceeds to S273, the mission counter is updated by subtracting "1". The mission counter is a counting means used for managing the progress of the mission effect in the mission mode, and the progress degree of the mission effect is grasped according to the value of the mission counter. By S267, the mission counter is updated by subtraction every time the variable display that causes the display result to deviate is performed. Then, in accordance with the received variation pattern command and the progress degree of the mission effect, a variation pattern for performing the mission effect is set (S274). Specifically, the mission effect is set so as to progress every time the fluctuating display is executed, and the image data to be displayed as the mission effect is selected as the variation pattern according to the degree of progress. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the mission counter has become “0” (S275). When it is determined that the value of the mission counter is not “0”, the mission effect is continued, and the process proceeds to S286 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the mission counter is “0”, it is in the first mission mode based on whether a first mission mode flag or a second mission flag described later is set. Whether or not (S276).

  When not in the first mission mode, that is, when in the second mission mode, the set second mission flag is reset (S277), the normal mode flag is set (S278), and the process proceeds to S286 described later. Thereby, when the period of the second mission is completed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. On the other hand, when in the first mission mode, it is determined whether or not to perform an additional mission (S279). Specifically, in S279, numerical data of a predetermined random counter for determining additional missions is extracted, and when the extracted value matches a predetermined additional mission determination value, it is determined to perform an additional mission.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an additional mission is determined by the additional mission determination in S279 (S280). When it is determined that no additional mission is to be performed, the set first mission flag is reset (S281), the high-accuracy notification mode flag is set (S282), and the process proceeds to S286 described later. As a result, when the period of the first mission ends and no additional mission is performed, the high-accuracy notification mode is entered. On the other hand, when it is determined that an additional mission is to be performed, the type of mission to be executed as the additional mission is randomly determined (S283). Specifically, in S283, numerical data of a random counter for effect content determination RT is extracted, and the types of missions corresponding to the extracted values are determined based on the numerical data, a plurality of types of missions, and a predetermined relationship. As an additional mission. Then, a mission type flag that identifies the type of mission determined in S283 is set (S284). This mission type flag is a flag provided corresponding to each of a plurality of types of missions that can be executed in order to specify the type of mission to be executed. Then, the number of mission continuations corresponding to the mission type specified by the mission type flag is set in the mission counter (S285), and the process proceeds to S286 described later.

  In S286, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern set in S268 or S274 is set in the variation time timer for measuring the variation display time in the variation display device 9, and the variation display time is measured by the variation time timer. Is started (S264). When the display of fluctuation is started when a big hit, a small hit, or a chance-off occurs, the production control mode is managed in S266. However, the production control mode is actually changed by the big win, the small win, Or after the missed opportunity has ended. For this reason, when the variable display is started, it is the same effect control mode as the previous effect control mode, and the variable display is performed in the effect control mode. For example, corresponding to each of the plurality of effect control modes, the color of the background image described above, the image of the character display mode indicating that it is in the mission mode as shown in FIGS. 31 to 41, and the probability change mode Control for displaying various images corresponding to the effect control mode, including the image of the character display mode indicating that it is in the middle, is performed by the effect control process. Thereby, after the winning game state is ended, for example, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 41, a current effect such as a notification that the mode is the probability variation mode, a notification that the mode is the mission mode, a notification that the mode is the short-time mode, etc. The effect control for notifying the control mode is continuously performed in the effect control process process (after the winning game state is ended, such effect control is started from the variation pattern command waiting process S400).

  Next, the variation display of the decorative pattern for deriving and displaying the display result in the variation display device 9 is started with the variation pattern set in S268 or S274 (S287). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the symbol changing process (S402) (S288), and the process returns.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the display result determination process (S261) in the symbol variation start process. In the display result determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display performed according to the received effect control command is the jackpot display result (S241). Specifically, when a command designating 15R normal big hit, 15R probability big hit, or 2R probability big hit is received as a symbol information command, it is determined that the big hit display result is obtained.

  If it is determined that the jackpot display result is obtained, the process proceeds to S249 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined not to be the big hit display result, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display performed according to the received effect control command is the small hit display result (S242). Specifically, when a command for designating a small hit is received as a symbol information command, it is determined that a small hit display result is obtained.

  When it is determined that the result is a small hit display result, the predetermined small hit symbol combination as described above is determined as the variable display result (S243), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit display result is not used, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display performed in accordance with the received effect control command is the chance display error display result (S244). Specifically, when a miss designation command is received as a symbol information command and a command designating a chance miss is received as a variation pattern command, it is determined that the chance miss is displayed.

  When it is determined that the chance-off is the display result, the predetermined combination of off-line symbols that is the above-mentioned chance is determined as the variable display result (S245), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display result is not the chance display, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display performed according to the received effect control command is the reach display result (S246). Specifically, when a shift designation command is received as a symbol information command and a command specifying a reach shift is received as a variation pattern command, it is determined that a reach shift display result is obtained.

  When it is determined that the reach-removed display result is obtained, the reach-removed symbol combination is randomly determined as the variable display result (S247), and the process returns. Specifically, first, the values of random counters RU-1 to RU-3 for determining decorative symbols are extracted. Then, using the reach design determination data table in which the relationship between the value of RU-1 and the reach symbol is determined in advance, the corresponding reach symbol is selected from the extracted values of RU-1, and the combination of the reach symbols is left. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the right symbol (reach symbol). Then, using the middle symbol determination data table in which the relationship between RU-2 and the middle symbol is determined in advance, the corresponding middle symbol is selected from the extracted value of RU-2. However, when the middle symbol corresponding to the extracted value of RU-2 matches the reach symbol, correction is performed to change the middle symbol so as not to match the reach symbol.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach-missed display result is not used, the display result of the variable display performed according to the received effect control command is the display result other than the chance eye display result and the reach-missed display result. More specifically, in this case, a deviation specifying command is received as the symbol information command, and a deviation variation pattern other than the reach variation pattern and the chance difference variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command. In this case, as a variable display result, a combination of out-of-chance symbols other than the chance-missed display result and the reach-missed display result is randomly determined (S248), and the process returns. More specifically, first, the value of random counters RU-1 to RU-3 for determining decorative symbols is extracted. The left symbol determination data table in which the relationship between the value of RU-1 and the left symbol is predetermined, the above-described middle symbol determination data table, and the relationship between the value of RU-3 and the right symbol is predetermined. Using the obtained right symbol determination data table, the corresponding decorative symbol is selected from the extracted values of RU-1 to RU-3, and the combination of the decorative symbol is determined as the combination of the decorative symbol stop symbol. However, if the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the extracted values of RU-1 to RU-3 matches the combination of the big hit symbol, the combination of the small bonus symbol, the chance symbol symbol, and the combination of the missed symbol symbol, it matches. In order to avoid this, correction is performed to change a symbol (for example, a middle symbol or a right symbol) at a predetermined position.

  If it is determined that the combination of the big hit symbol is determined by the determination in S241 and the process proceeds to S249, it is determined whether or not the primary re-lottery display is designated (S249). Specifically, in S249, it is determined whether or not the primary re-lottery display has been designated according to the information on the presence or absence of the primary re-lottery display indicated by the received variation pattern command. When it is determined that the primary re-lottery display has not been designated, the process proceeds to S251 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the primary re-lottery display has been designated, a combination of non-probable big hit symbols is randomly determined as a temporary stop symbol to be displayed before the primary re-lottery (S250), and the process proceeds to S251 described later.

  In S250, the combination of non-probable variation big hit symbols is determined as follows. First, the value of RU-1 is extracted. Then, using the first non-probability variable jackpot symbol determination data table in which the relationship between the value of RU-1 and the non-probable variable jackpot symbol (decorative pattern other than 7) is determined in advance, the extracted value of RU-1 Then, the corresponding non-probable variation jackpot symbol is selected, and the combination of the non-probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the combination of the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not to make a probable big hit (S251). Specifically, in S251, for example, when a symbol information command designating 15R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery designation command or the like is received, or a 2R probability variable big hit / secondary second lottery designation command is received. When a symbol information command designating such a 2R probability variation big hit is received, it is determined that the probability variation big hit is assumed. When it is determined that it is a probable big hit, the process proceeds to S253 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is not made, the fluctuation display result before the big hit gaming state is reached (if the primary re-lottery display is displayed, the display result of the primary re-lottery display is not displayed and the primary re-lottery display is not displayed. Is a display result of variable display), a combination of non-probable variation big hit symbols is randomly determined (S252).

  Specifically, in S252, the combination of uncertain change big hit symbols is determined as follows. First, the value of RU-2 is extracted. Then, RU-2 is extracted using the second non-probable variable big hit symbol determination data table in which the relationship between the value of RU-2 and the non-probable variable big hit symbol (decorative pattern other than 7) is determined in advance. The corresponding non-probable variation jackpot symbol is selected from the values, and the combination of the non-probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  Further, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is made in S251 and the process proceeds to S253, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit is set. Specifically, in S253, when the 2R probability variation big hit / secondary re-lottery designation command is received, it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit is assumed. When it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit is not made, that is, when the 15R probability variation big hit is made, the process proceeds to S255 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit is determined, the combination of the 2R probability variable big hit symbols (the “135” chance) as described above is determined as the fluctuation display result before the big hit gaming state is reached (S254), and the process returns. .

  If it is determined in S253 that the 2R probability variation big hit is not made (the 15R probability variation big hit is assumed) and the process proceeds to S255, it is judged whether or not the secondary re-lottery display has been designated. Specifically, in S255, when the 15R probability variable big hit / secondary re-lottery designation command is received, it is determined that the secondary re-lottery display has been designated. When it is determined that the secondary re-lottery display has not been designated, the 15R probability variable big hit symbol combination (“777”) is determined as the variable display result (256), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the secondary re-lottery display has been designated, the combination of non-probable variable big hit symbols is randomly determined as the variable display result before the big hit gaming state is entered (S257) and the process returns. .

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the gaming state management process (S266) in the symbol variation start process. In the gaming state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal mode is designated after the change display by the received change pattern command (S331). Specifically, in S331, when “after normal mode” is designated by the variation pattern command, it is determined that the normal mode after the variation display is designated.

  When it is determined that the normal mode is not specified after the variable display, the process proceeds to S335 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal mode is designated after the variable display, it is determined whether or not the normal mode flag has already been set (S332). If it is determined that the normal mode flag is set, the process returns without changing the mode flag. As a result, the control mode continues in the normal mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal mode flag is not set, the other mode flags set at that time are reset (S333), the normal mode flag is set (S334), and the process returns. As a result, the control mode shifts from the other mode to the normal mode.

  If it is determined in S331 that it is not specified that the normal mode is set after the change display, and the process proceeds to S335, it is determined whether the mission mode is specified after the change display by the received change pattern command. to decide. Specifically, in S335, when the “post mission mode” is designated by the variation pattern command, it is determined that the mission mode is designated after the variation display.

  If it is determined that the mission mode is not designated after the change display, the process proceeds to S347 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission mode is designated after the change display, the received symbol information is used to distinguish whether the mission mode is the first mission mode or the second mission mode. It is determined whether or not it is designated by the command or the fluctuation pattern command that a small hit or a chance is missed (S336). Specifically, when the symbol information command is a command for specifying a small hit, it is determined that a small hit is specified, and when “off chance” is specified by the variation pattern command, the chance is It is determined that the eye dislocation has been specified. In the case of this embodiment, the first mission mode after the fluctuation display is when the 15R probability variation big hit A, 15R probability variation big hit B, or 2R probability variation big hit B in the normal mode or the second mission mode, This is when 15R probability change big hit B, small hit, or when the chance is off in one mission mode. In the case of this embodiment, the second mission mode after the change display is the small hit or chance in the normal mode and the small mission or chance in the second mission mode. When it comes off. Therefore, the first mission mode or the second mission mode after the change display is in the first mission mode, the normal mode, or the second mission mode. For this reason, first of all, in the variation display in the mission mode (the first mission mode and the second mission mode) after the variation display, the first mission is changed from the variation display that is out of the small hit or chance chance except the variation display that is a big hit. Except for the fluctuation display that is out of the small hit or chance chance in the mode, the fluctuation display that becomes the second mission mode after the fluctuation display can be determined. Then, in addition to the change display that becomes the second mission mode, it can be determined that the change display becomes the first mission mode. Therefore, the fluctuation display that becomes the first mission mode after the fluctuation display is distinguished from the fluctuation display that becomes the second mission mode after the fluctuation display as follows.

  When it is specified in S336 that a small hit or a chance miss is designated, the first mission mode is determined to determine whether a small hit or a chance miss is lost. It is determined whether or not the 1 mission mode flag is set (S337). The first mission mode flag is set when the mission mode is entered after a small hit or chance is lost after the fluctuation display. On the other hand, when the first mission mode flag is not set, that is, when the normal mode flag or the second mission mode flag is set, the second mission mode is set after the small hit or chance is lost. It is time to become. Therefore, when it is determined in S337 that the first mission mode flag is not set, it is the time when the second mission mode is set, so it is determined whether or not the second mission mode flag has already been set (S338). ). If it is determined that the second mission mode flag is set, the process proceeds to S344 without changing the mode flag. As a result, the control mode continues in the second mission mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second mission mode flag is not set, the other mode flag (normal mode flag) set at that time is reset (S339), and the second mission mode flag is set. (S340), it progresses to S344. As a result, the control mode shifts from the other mode (normal mode) to the second mission mode.

  If it is determined that it is not specified that a small hit or a missed chance is designated, it is determined whether or not the first mission mode flag is set (S341). When it is determined that the first mission mode flag is set, the process proceeds to S344 without changing the mode flag. As a result, the control mode continues in the first mission mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first mission mode flag is not set, other mode flags set at that time are reset (S342), the first mission mode flag is set (S343), and S344. Proceed to As a result, when it is not designated by the effect control command that a small hit or a chance is lost, the control mode shifts from the other mode to the first mission mode.

  In S344, the type of mission to be executed as a mission effect is randomly determined. Specifically, in S344, numerical data of a random counter for effect content determination RT is extracted, and the types of missions corresponding to the extracted values are determined based on the numerical data, the types of multiple types of missions, and a predetermined relationship. Is determined as a mission to execute. Then, a mission type flag that identifies the type of mission determined in S344 is set (S345). Then, the number of mission continuations corresponding to the mission type specified by the mission type flag is set in the mission counter (S346), and the process returns.

  If it is determined in S335 that the mission mode is not designated after the variation display and the process proceeds to S347, it is determined whether or not the probability variation mode is designated after the variation display by the received variation pattern command. to decide. Specifically, in S347, it is determined that when the “post-change change mode” is specified by the change pattern command, it is specified that the change-to-change mode is set after the change display.

  If it is determined that it is not specified to enter the probability change mode after the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to S351 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change mode is designated after the fluctuation display, it is determined whether or not the probability change mode flag is already set (S348). If it is determined that the probability variation mode flag is set, the process returns without changing the mode flag. As a result, the control mode continues in the probability variation mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation mode flag is not set, the other mode flags set at that time are reset (S349), the probability variation mode flag is set (S350), and the process returns. As a result, the control mode shifts from the other mode to the probability change mode.

  If it is determined in S347 that it is not specified to enter the probability change mode after the fluctuation display, and the process proceeds to S351, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is specified after the fluctuation display by the received fluctuation pattern command. to decide. Specifically, in S351, when the “short time mode” is designated by the variation pattern command, it is determined that the short time mode is designated after the variation display.

  If it is determined that it is not specified to be in the short time mode after the change display, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction mode is designated after the variable display, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode flag has already been set (S352). If it is determined that the time reduction mode flag is set, the process returns without changing the mode flag. As a result, the control mode continues in the time reduction mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction mode flag is not set, the other mode flags set at that time are reset (S353), and the time reduction mode flag is set (S354). As a result, the control mode shifts from the other mode to the time reduction mode. Then, it is determined whether or not a small hit is specified by the symbol information fixed command (S355). When it is determined that the small hit is specified, the process returns. When it is determined that the small hit is not specified, the shortening counter is set (S356) and the process returns. Thus, when the time reduction mode is set based on the 15R normal big hit in the first mission mode (high accuracy notification mode) or the probability variation mode, the shortening counter used for managing the duration of the time reduction mode in S356. Is set to start counting again. On the other hand, when the time reduction mode is continued based on the small hit in the time reduction mode, the process returns from S355, so the count value of the shortening counter is continued before the occurrence of the small hit.

  As described above, the effect control microcomputer 800 manages the control mode based on the received effect control command in the gaming state management process.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the symbol variation processing (S402) of FIG. In the symbol variation processing, the effect control microcomputer 800 performs the following processing.

  First, the above-described change time timer and the process timer used for managing display control in the changing process are updated (S291). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the process timer has timed out (S292). If it has timed out, the effect control execution data is switched (S293), and the process proceeds to S294. If not timed out, the process proceeds to S294. In this embodiment, process data indicating the variation pattern of the decorative design is provided (stored) for each variation pattern. The process data is constituted by data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer data and presentation control execution data. The effect control microcomputer 800 selects process data corresponding to the change pattern command and refers to the process data in the change mode set in the effect control execution data for the time set in the process timer. Controls to display the variable. As a result, in the variation pattern designated to display the first re-lottery display, once the combination of the temporary stop symbols is temporarily stopped for the decorative symbol in the designated variation pattern, the variation display is started again. Thereafter, the variable display including the first re-lottery display for deriving and displaying the combination of the probability variation big hit symbol or the combination of the non-probability big hit symbol can be performed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (S294). If the variable time timer has not timed out, return. On the other hand, if the variable time timer has timed out, a monitoring timer for monitoring the reception period of the symbol stop command is set and started (S295), and the production control process flag corresponds to the symbol stop waiting process (S403). The value is updated (S296), and the process returns.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the hit game processing (S405) of FIG. In the hit game process, the effect control microcomputer 800 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the hit game state including the big hit game state and the small hit game state has ended (S301). Specifically, in S301, when any ending display command reception flag is set, it is determined that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  When it is determined that the winning game state is ended, the process proceeds to S310 which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not at the end of the winning game state, it is first determined whether or not a small hit game is being performed based on the information stored in the aforementioned winning information storage area (S302). For example, when information indicating the small hit at that time is stored in the hit information storage area, it is determined that the small hit gaming state is in effect. If it is determined that the game is in the small hit game state, the process returns. This is because the effect of the small hit gaming state is started in the winning display process, but in the small hit gaming state, the display contents are not displayed in units of rounds as described above. This is because the contents are not managed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the small hit game state, it is determined whether or not the 2R probability change big hit game state is included (including both 2R probability change big hit A and 2R probability change big hit B) (S303). For example, when information indicating the 2R probability variation big hit is stored in the hit information storage area at that time, it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state is in effect. When it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state is in progress, the process returns. This is because the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state effect is started in the hit display process, but the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state effect display of the display content that is not divided in round units is performed as in the small hit gaming state. This is because the display contents in round units are not managed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state is not in effect, whether or not it is the start time of each round based on determining whether or not the round start command reception flag corresponding to each round is set Is determined (S304). When it is determined that it is not at the start of each round, the process proceeds to S307 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start time of each round, a display indicating the number of rounds of each round is displayed (S305), a display for producing during each round is started (S306), and the process proceeds to S307.

  In S307, based on determining whether the round end command reception flag corresponding to each round is set, it is determined whether it is the end of each round. If it is determined that it is not the end of each round, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that each round ends, it is determined whether or not the current round is the final round (the 15th round) based on the number of rounds indicated by the received round end command (S308). When it is determined that it is not the final round, display for producing between rounds is started (S309), and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current round is the last round, the process does not proceed to the next round, so the process returns without starting the display for producing the effect between the rounds.

  If it is determined in S301 that the big hit gaming state has been completed and the process proceeds to S310, the second re-lottery is performed by at least one of the symbol information command, the hit start command, and the ending display command. It is determined whether or not display is specified. In S310, for example, based on the secondary re-lottery display information stored in the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not execution of the secondary re-lottery display is designated. When it is determined that execution of the secondary re-lottery display is not designated, an effect process that does not display the secondary re-lottery display is executed through S311 to S316.

  First, based on the information on the small hit stored in the hit information storage area described above, it is determined whether or not the small hit gaming state is in effect (S311). For example, when information indicating the small hit at that time is stored in the hit information storage area, it is determined that the small hit gaming state is in effect. When it is determined that the game state is in the small hit game state, the process proceeds to S315 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in the small hit gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is in the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state based on the information about the big hit stored in the aforementioned hit information storage area (S312). . For example, when information indicating the 2R probability variation big hit is stored in the hit information storage area at that time, it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state is in effect.

  When it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit gaming state is in progress, the process proceeds to S315 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state is not in effect, the end display timer is set by setting the big hit normal end display time, which is a preset time as the display time of the big hit normal end display, to the end display timer. Start (S313). Then, a big hit end display corresponding to the big hit normal end display is started (S314), and the process proceeds to S324. In this jackpot end display, the effect control mode after the jackpot gaming state is indicated according to the received command and the flag indicating the effect control mode after the jackpot gaming state (flag set by the gaming state management process of FIG. 70). Display is performed.

  Further, when it is determined that the game state is in the small hit game state or is determined to be in the 2R probability variable big hit game state and the process proceeds to S315, the display mode is different from the ending display at the end of the 15R big hit game state. In order to perform the display at the end of chance hitting, such as the display of the effect control mode after the end of the hit gaming state, the end display timer has a display about the display at the end of the 2R probability variable big hit and the display at the end of the small hit The end display timer is started by setting a display time at the end of chance per eye that is a preset time as a common display time. Then, the display at the end of the chance eye for displaying the effect control mode after the hit is started (S316), and the process proceeds to S324. In this display, in accordance with the received command and the flag indicating the effect control mode after the winning gaming state (flag set by the gaming state management process in FIG. 70), the display indicating the effect control mode after the winning gaming state is displayed. Done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S310 that execution of the secondary re-lottery display is designated, the command (S310 described as being designated to execute the secondary re-lottery display) At least one command) determines whether or not there is a completion in the secondary re-lottery display (S317). In S317, for example, based on the information of the secondary re-lottery display stored in the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not there is a designation for completion in the secondary re-lottery display.

  When it is determined in the secondary re-lottery display that there is no completion is designated, the process proceeds to S321 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the completion is specified in the secondary re-lottery display, the display result in the secondary re-lottery display is a display for specifying a high probability (probability change) as shown in (i7) of FIG. Hereinafter, it is determined to be a high probability specific display (S318). Then, the end display timer is started by setting a predetermined secondary re-lottery display time as a time for executing the secondary re-lottery display to the end display timer used for managing the ending display time. (S319). The execution time of the secondary re-lottery display set in S319 is set to be longer than the execution time of the big hit normal end display set in S314 described above. Then, the secondary re-lottery display that rises to the probability variation big hit as determined in S318 is started (S320), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the winning game end process (S406) (S324), Return. Thereby, the secondary re-lottery display for displaying the completion is executed. In this display, in accordance with the received command and the flag indicating the effect control mode after the jackpot gaming state (flag set by the gaming state management process in FIG. 70), the display indicating the effect control mode after the jackpot gaming state is displayed. Done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the completion has not been specified in the secondary re-lottery display and the process proceeds to S321, the display result in the secondary re-lottery display shows a low probability (not shown) as shown in (k4) of FIG. (Probability change) is determined to be specified (hereinafter referred to as low probability specific display). Then, the end display timer is started by setting the above-mentioned secondary re-lottery display time in the end display timer (S322). The execution time of the secondary re-lottery display set in S322 is set to be longer than the execution time of the big hit normal end display set in S314 described above. Then, the secondary re-lottery display that does not grow at the probability variation big hit as determined in S321 is started (S323), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the winning game end process (S406) (S324). To return. As a result, the secondary re-lottery display is performed to display that no improvement is achieved. In this display, in accordance with the received command and the flag indicating the effect control mode after the jackpot gaming state (flag set by the gaming state management process in FIG. 70), the display indicating the effect control mode after the jackpot gaming state is displayed. Done.

  As described above, the secondary re-lottery display is executed when execution of the secondary re-lottery display is specified by at least one of the symbol information command, the jackpot start command, and the ending display command. The Thus, for example, even when the symbol information command cannot be received or when the power is turned off after receiving the symbol information command, at least one of the big hit start command and the ending display command is received. Based on this, the secondary re-lottery display can be executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the effect control commands transmitted after the winning gaming state occurs, the winning type, the presence / absence of the second re-lottery display, An example is shown in which information about the presence or absence of completion is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot, the presence / absence of the second re-lottery display, and the completion by one or more (including all) of the following commands: You may make it show the information regarding the presence or absence of. Examples of such commands include hit start commands, round start commands, round end commands, and ending display commands. As described above, among the effect control commands transmitted after the winning gaming state is generated, the command indicating the information regarding the winning type, the presence / absence of the second re-lottery display, and the presence / absence of the completion is the command described above. At least one command may be used. In that case, in S310 of FIG. 72, a command (one or more) indicating information about the symbol information command, the presence / absence of the secondary re-lottery display transmitted after the jackpot gaming state has occurred, and the presence / absence of completion ), It is sufficient to determine whether or not execution of the secondary re-lottery display is specified by at least one of the commands. Further, the round start command or the round end command including information related to the secondary re-lottery display may be a command transmitted to a specific round, or a command transmitted to an unspecified round determined by lottery. It may be.

  In this embodiment, as each of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is operated for a predetermined period (one round 30 seconds) determined in the normal big hit gaming state and the 15R probability variable big hit gaming state. ) In a shorter period (one round for one second) and a smaller number of times (number of times of two rounds) than the predetermined number of times (number of times of 15 rounds), the 2R probability variation big hit game An example of shifting to the probability variation control mode after the end of the state is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is operated for a period shorter than a predetermined period (one round for one second) and a number smaller than a predetermined number (two rounds). Any one of them may be used as long as it is changed to the first state (open state). Accordingly, in each of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is operated for a predetermined period (one round 30 seconds) and a number of times (two rounds) less than the predetermined number (15 rounds). May be changed to the first state (open state), and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be changed in a period (one round of one second) shorter than a predetermined period (one round of 30 seconds) and a predetermined number of times. You may change to the 1st state (open state) by (the number of times of 15 rounds).

(Other examples of fluctuation pattern commands)
Next, another example of the variation pattern command will be described. As with the symbol information command, the variation pattern command may specify the presence / absence of secondary re-lottery display and the presence / absence of completion. As described above, when the change pattern command designates the presence / absence of the secondary re-lottery display and the presence / absence of the completion, the determination of the designation of the secondary re-lottery in S255 of FIG. If at least one of the commands designates secondary re-lottery display, it is determined that secondary re-lottery display is present. In addition, regarding the determination of the designation of the secondary re-lottery display in S310 of FIG. 72, it is determined that the secondary re-lottery display is present even when the variation pattern command designates the presence of the secondary re-lottery display. The presence / absence of the secondary re-lottery display and the presence / absence of the completion may be specified by at least one of the symbol information command and the variation pattern command. For example, the presence / absence of the secondary re-lottery display and the designation of the presence / absence of the completion may be configured to be performed only by the variation pattern command, may be configured only by the symbol information command, or You may comprise so that it may be performed by both a fluctuation pattern command and a symbol information command. When such a configuration is adopted, the secondary re-lottery designation determination in S255 of FIG. 69 and the secondary re-lottery display designation determination in S310 of FIG. Only variation pattern commands that specify the presence / absence of re-lottery display and the presence / absence of completion Only the symbol information command that specifies the presence / absence of secondary re-lottery display and the presence / absence of completion, or What is necessary is just to use both the change pattern command and symbol information command which designate the presence or absence and the presence or absence of completion.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, a low-accuracy low base state, a high-accuracy low base state, and a high-accuracy high-base state are provided as the game states that shift when controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, there are a plurality of gaming states with different bases based on different settings of the ease of starting winning. In this way, by having a plurality of gaming states with different bases, the player can realize whether the gaming state is advantageous or unfavorable in the game until the big hit gaming state occurs. Become. Further, in FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy and low base state, the probability of becoming the high-accuracy and low-base state is 10%, and the probability of becoming the high-accuracy and high-base state is 30%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy high-base state, the probability of the high-accuracy low-base state is 0%, and the probability of the high-accuracy high-base state is 40%. In this way, the ratio of determining to control to the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit gaming state and the big hit game when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy high base state is controlled. Since the ratio determined when controlling to the high-accuracy base state after the state ends is different, it is possible to give the player a strong interest in how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (2) In FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy and low base state, the probability that the low-accuracy and low-base state is reached is 0%, and the probability that the high-accuracy and high-base state is reached is 30%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy high-base state, the probability of becoming a low-accuracy low-base state is 0%, and the probability of becoming a high-accuracy high-base state is 40%. As described above, when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy high-base state is controlled, the ratio of determining to control the normal state after the big hit gaming state ends, and after the big hit gaming state ends. Since the ratio to be determined when controlling to the high-accuracy and high-base state is different, it is possible to give a strong interest to the player as to how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (3) In FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the low-accuracy and low base state, the probability of the high-accuracy and low-base state is 30%, and the probability of the high-accuracy and high-base state is 10%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability of being in the highly accurate and low base state is 10%, and the probability of being in the highly accurate and high base state is 30%. In this way, when the control is set to the normal state and when the control is performed to the high probability low base state, the ratio that is determined to control the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends, and after the big hit gaming state ends. Since the ratio to be determined when controlling to the high-accuracy and high-base state is different, it is possible to give a strong interest to the player as to how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (4) In FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the low probability and low base state, the probability of becoming the low probability and low base state is 60%, and the probability of becoming the high probability and high base state is 10%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy and low base state, the probability of the low-accuracy and low-base state is 0%, and the probability of the high-accuracy and high-base state is 30%. As described above, when the normal state is controlled and when the high probability low base state is controlled, it is determined that the normal state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished, and the high probability is high after the big hit gaming state is finished. Since the ratio determined when controlling to the base state is made different, it is possible to give the player a strong interest in how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (5) The high-accuracy base state is a state advantageous to the player with respect to the probability of being a big hit and the ease of starting, and is the most advantageous state for the player among a plurality of probabilities / base states. . In FIG. 17, when a big hit is generated in the high-accuracy and high base state, the probability of being in the high-accuracy and high-base state is 40%. The probability is 10%, and when the big hit occurs in the highly accurate low base state, the probability of being in the highly accurate high base state is 30%. As described above, when the high-accuracy base state is controlled, the high-accuracy base state is controlled at a higher rate than when the high-accuracy base state is set, so that the high-accuracy base state is controlled. In some cases, it is easy to continue the high-accuracy and high-base state that is advantageous to the player as compared to other states. Thereby, a player's interest can be raised about the transition from the other state of a highly accurate high base state to a highly accurate high base state.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, a low-accuracy low base state, a high-accuracy low base state, and a low-accuracy high-base state are provided as gaming states that are shifted when controlled to the big hit gaming state. Therefore, there are a plurality of gaming states with different bases based on different settings of the ease of starting winning. In this way, by having a plurality of gaming states with different bases, the player can realize whether the gaming state is advantageous or unfavorable in the game until the big hit gaming state occurs. Become. Further, in FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability of becoming the highly accurate and low base state is 10%, and the probability of becoming the low probability and high base state is 60%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the low accuracy and high base state, the probability of becoming the high accuracy and low base state is 0%, and the probability of becoming the low accuracy and high base state is 0%. In this way, the ratio of determining to control to the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and the big hit game when being controlled to the high probability low base state and when being controlled to the low probability high base state Since the ratio to be determined to control to the low-accuracy base state after the state ends is different, it is possible to give the player a strong interest in how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (7) In FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the high-accuracy and low base state, the probability of the low-accuracy and low-base state is 0%, and the probability of the low-accuracy and high-base state is 60%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the low accuracy and high base state, the probability of becoming the low accuracy and low base state is 60%, and the probability of becoming the low accuracy and high base state is 0%. In this way, when the control is made to the high probability low base state and when the control is made to the low probability high base state, the ratio determined to control to the normal state after the big hit gaming state ends, and after the big hit gaming state ends Since the ratio to be determined to control to the low-accuracy base state is different, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (8) In FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the low-accuracy and low base state, the probability of being in the high-accuracy and low-base state is 30%, and the probability of being in the low-accuracy and high-base state is 0%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability of becoming the highly accurate and low base state is 10%, and the probability of becoming the low probability and high base state is 60%. In this way, when the control is set to the normal state and when the control is performed to the high probability low base state, the ratio that is determined to control the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends, and after the big hit gaming state ends. Since the ratio to be determined to control to the low-accuracy base state is different, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (9) In FIG. 17, when a big hit occurs in the low probability and low base state, the probability of becoming the low probability and low base state is 60%, and the probability of becoming the low probability and high base state is 0%. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability of becoming the low probability and low base state is 0%, and the probability of becoming the low probability and high base state is 60%. As described above, when the normal state is controlled and when the high probability low base state is controlled, the ratio that is determined to control the normal state after the big hit gaming state ends, and the low probability high after the big hit gaming state ends. Since the ratio determined when controlling to the base state is made different, it is possible to give the player a strong interest in how the gaming state shifts. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 35 and the like, the primary re-lottery display and the secondary re-lottery display are executed as effects performed to indicate whether or not the variable display device 9 is in a certain variation state. it can. By providing a plurality of types of effect display performed to indicate whether or not the state is likely to change, a variety of effect display is provided, so that the player's interest can be enhanced in terms of the effect display. . Further, since the secondary re-lottery display is performed after the big hit gaming state is started, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the execution of the primary re-lottery display is instructed based on the variation pattern command, and it is determined as Y in S249 of FIG. 69, and at least one of the variation pattern command and the symbol information command and the big hit When the execution of the secondary re-lottery display is instructed based on at least one of the commands (the hit start command and the ending display command) instructing the secondary re-lottery display transmitted after the start, the symbol information command is When it is determined that the control to be in the probable change state has been made, Y is determined in S251 in FIG. 69, and Y is determined in S255. In S257 in FIG. The display result is determined, and the high probability specific display is determined as the display result of the secondary re-lottery display in S318 of FIG.As a result, in the variation display at the time of the probable big hit, there is an inconvenience of the effect display that the primary re-lottery display before the secondary re-lottery display shows that the probable change state is shown. Can be prevented. Whether or not a display indicating that the state is likely to be changed by execution of the secondary re-lottery display is performed by a command for instructing the secondary re-lottery display transmitted after the start of the big hit, such as a big hit start command and an ending display command. Since it is instructed, it can be prevented that the secondary re-lottery display erroneously indicates whether or not a display indicating that the state is surely changed is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 53, 55, and 58, a symbol information command or a variation pattern command transmitted at different timings such as when the variable display is started and after the big hit gaming state is started 72, it is shown that the secondary re-lottery display is executed by a plurality of commands including commands (hit start command, ending display command) instructing the secondary re-lottery display transmitted after the big hit gaming state is started. As shown in S310 and S317 to S323, when at least one of these commands indicates that the secondary re-lottery display is to be executed, it is determined that the execution of the secondary re-lottery display has been instructed. . As described above, it is indicated that the second effect display is executed using a plurality of commands transmitted at different timings. For example, the display control microcomputer 800 misses the symbol information command (or the variation pattern command). And when the display control microcomputer 800 captures the symbol information command (or variation pattern command), the secondary re-lottery based on one command is performed as in the case where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Even when the display cannot be executed, the secondary re-lottery display can be executed based on the other command such as the command for instructing the secondary re-lottery display transmitted after the start of the big hit. Further, even when the display control microcomputer 800 misses a command for instructing the secondary re-lottery display transmitted after the big hit gaming state is started, when the symbol information command (or variation pattern command) is received. Based on the symbol information command, the secondary re-lottery display can be executed.

  (11) By performing the second mission mode, which is a fake mission mode as shown in FIG. 38, by S336 to S340 and S344 to S346 in FIG. 70, the result of the variable display becomes the small hit display result. Sometimes, even when it is not in the first mission mode, which is the true mission mode, the production mode is changed to the mission mode, so even if the actual probability / base state is not changed By changing the production mode, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the probability / base state has been changed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  (12) The game control microcomputer 560 performs initial setting of the random number circuit 503 from the start of power-on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the timer interrupt is set, as shown in S15 of FIG. 46, since the value based on the ID number for identifying the game control microcomputer 560 is set as the initial value of the random number in the initial setting, the random number circuit 503 generates the random number circuit 503. The randomness of random numbers can be improved. In addition, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and by generating a capture signal using a radio signal to a gaming machine It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the big hit gaming state from being illegally established.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 17, when 2R probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B) is controlled in the low probability low base state, the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends. Alternatively, it is determined to control to a highly accurate and high base state. In addition, when the control is controlled to the high-accuracy base state, if the 2R probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B) is determined, it is determined to control to the high probability high base state after the big hit gaming state. Is done. Thereby, even when the same 2R probability variation big hit that opens the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 twice occurs, the transition state differs depending on the state when the big hit occurs, so the game caused by the big hit gaming state With regard to the state transition, the player can be strongly interested in how the gaming state transitions. And by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the big hit gaming state. In addition, in both the state of being controlled to the low accuracy low base state and the state of being controlled to the high accuracy high base, when the 2R probability variable big hit, it is in a disadvantageous state for the player than the current situation. Since the transition does not occur, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being lowered due to the 2R probability variation big hit.

  (14) As shown in S266 and S268 in FIG. 68 and S340, S343, and S344 to S346 in FIG. 70, the 2R probability variable big hit A and the 2R probability variable big hit B in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened twice. When the decision to control is made and when it is decided that the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to the small hit where the control for releasing the special variable winning ball device 20 is performed twice, the same effect mode is obtained after the winning gaming state is finished. Controlled to the mission effect state. This makes it difficult for a player to distinguish whether or not a high-probability state is in effect when the mission effect state is being controlled. It is possible to increase the player's expectation and improve the player's interest. In addition, when it is controlled to the mission effect state, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether or not it is in a high probability state. Therefore, when the game is controlled when the mission effect state is controlled, Since it becomes difficult for a person to judge, the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  (15) As shown in S277, S278, and S282 of FIG. 68, after the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends, the mission effect state is controlled until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, and the 2R probability variable big hit is controlled. When you decide to control to the gaming state and when you decide to control to the small hit gaming state, the effect mode when the mission effect state ends is different, so by looking at the effect mode, The player can infer what state the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is.

  (16) As shown in FIG. 17, when the 2R probability variation big hit A is set in the low probability low base state, the high probability high base state is established, and the probability variation mode in which the high probability state is informed as shown in FIG. 32 (d4). To be controlled. On the other hand, when the 2R probability variation big hit B is set in the low probability low base state, the high probability low base state is set, and the mission mode is controlled so as not to notify the high probability state as shown in FIG. 31 (a5). For this reason, after the end of the 2R probability variation big hit, the high probability state is set, but there are a case where the high probability state is notified and a case where the high probability state is not notified. More specifically, for example, whether or not the high probability state is notified after the end of the 2R probability variation big hit is selected between the 2R probability variation big hit A and the 2R probability variation big hit B in the low probability low base state. It is determined depending on whether the probability variation mode or the mission mode is selected. As described above, even when the high probability state is not notified, the player recognizes that the high probability state may be present, so that the high probability state is not notified. However, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of a high probability state. Thereby, a player's interest can be improved about the transition of the gaming state resulting from the big hit gaming state.

  (17) As shown in FIG. 17, when the 2R probability variation big hit B in the low probability low base state is terminated, when the high probability state is not notified, but the 2R probability variation big hit B is terminated, Since the mission effect is performed on the condition that the big hit gaming state has been completed, the probability of being in the big hit gaming state increases, so the possibility that the mission can be achieved increases. Thereby, the player's expectation with respect to the mission effect can be improved.

  (18) As shown in S336, S340, FIG. 38, and FIG. 39 in FIG. 70, even after a time other than after the end of 2R probability variation big hit (more specifically, 2R probability variation big hit B) in the low probability low base state. Since the mission effect is performed, the frequency of the mission effect is increased. Therefore, the player's expectation for the mission effect can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

  (19) As shown in S282 of FIG. 68 and (h4) of FIG. 34, when 2R probability variation big hit B big hit gaming state in the low probability low base state not informing that the high probability state is controlled is controlled. Even if there is, when the predetermined period elapses after the big hit gaming state ends, the fact that it is controlled to the high probability state is notified, so that the player can recognize that it was in the high probability state. it can. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the disadvantage that the player feels when he / she has not won a big hit for a long time.

  (20) The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs a latch signal for storing the random value in the random value storage circuit 531 in synchronization with the inverted clock signal obtained by inverting the polarity of the clock signal by the inversion circuit 532 in FIG. Thus, the timing for updating the random number value and the timing for storing the random number value in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number value can be stored stably and reliably.

  (21) Whether a plurality of random number circuits having different ranges of numerical data that can be updated, such as the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b shown in FIG. Since it is configured, the range of the random value to be generated can be appropriately set by setting only the random number circuit to be used. Therefore, for example, when game control processing is performed using only random numbers generated by one of the two random number circuits 503a and 503b, unnecessary processing such as reading random numbers from a random number circuit that is not used for processing can be omitted. It is possible to reduce the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560.

  (22) Since S153c in FIG. 45 is configured in advance to set a value as the maximum value of the range in which numerical data is updated, a value larger than the range of random numbers used during the execution of the timer interrupt process is set. Generation of random values can be prevented, and the processing load on the random number circuit 503 and the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. Further, when the set maximum value is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value, the maximum value is set again. Therefore, malfunction of the game control microcomputer 560 or a capture signal using a radio signal is set. It is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number value by an action such as causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be generated.

  (23) Since the counter 521 is configured to preset the number of clock signal inputs, which is a condition for updating the numerical data, by S156 in FIG. 44, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. be able to.

  (24) Since S154b of FIG. 46 and S225 of FIG. 49 are configured to set the initial value based on the value calculated by the calculation using the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560, the random number The randomness of the random numbers generated by the circuit 503 can be further improved. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the initial value of the random number value only by looking at the ID number, and it is possible to improve the security.

  (25) When the numerical data generated by the random number circuit 503 is updated to the final value, the initial value is updated according to S220 to S226 in FIG. 49. Therefore, the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is random. The sex can be further improved.

  (26) The latch signal generation circuit 533 in FIG. 6 latches the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526 in synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532. As shown to be output to the random value storage circuit 531 as the signal SL, when the random value storage circuit 531 stores the random value based on the output of the latch signal, the winning is continuously performed for a predetermined period. Since the latch signal is output on condition that the detection signal SS is input, the generation of the noise is erroneously recognized as the input of the winning detection signal SS, the latch signal SL is output, and the generated random value Can be prevented from being stored. In addition, the possibility that a latch signal is output by an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a random number value generated by an illegal latch signal is stored is reduced. be able to.

  (27) The latch signal generation circuit 533 synchronizes the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526 with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532 as the latch signal SL. As shown in FIG. 6, outputting to the random value storage circuit 531, when reading the random R value stored as the random value from the random value storage circuit 531, a timer interruption process is executed a predetermined number of times. Since the random number value is read from the random value storage circuit 531 on condition that the winning detection signal SS is continuously input, the random number value is read and stored in the random value storage circuit 531. It is possible to prevent the random number value from being read again before the random number value to be updated is updated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the random value having the same value as the random value read from the random value storage circuit 531 from being read out last time from being read again.

  (28) When the numerical data of the random number circuit 503 is updated to the final value, the count value permutation output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 is changed to the count value permutation changing circuit 523 as shown in S105 of FIG. Since the arrangement order from the initial value to the final value is updated, the randomness of the random number value generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  (29) Generally, when it is inspected whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 is a regular microcomputer, the inside of the microcomputer is imaged by X-rays, and the regular microcomputer is based on the imaging result. A test is performed to determine if the computer is a computer. Therefore, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 includes the random number circuit 503 can be determined based on the X-ray imaging result. Therefore, by adopting a structure in which the random number circuit 503 is incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560, when the microcomputer is counterfeited, the counterfeiter of the random number circuit 503 considers that an imaging inspection is performed by X-rays. Since it is necessary to make even counterfeit, it can be made difficult to forge.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In embodiment mentioned above, the example comprised by the special symbol display 8 and the decoration fluctuation display apparatus 9 was demonstrated about the fluctuation | variation display part. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation display unit may be configured only by a special symbol display device that displays special symbols. In that case, a special symbol display device is configured by a display device capable of displaying an image similar to the decorative variation display device 9, and the same symbol as the above-mentioned decorative symbol is displayed as the special symbol displayed by the special symbol display device. While displaying, it controls so that various images other than decorative designs, such as the background image mentioned above, may be displayed similarly.

  (2) In the embodiment described above, display control, sound control, and lamp control are performed as effect control means for controlling the effect control device including the decoration variation display device 9 (game effect control) based on the control signal. The production control microcomputer 800 capable of comprehensively controlling the above is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be adopted. A microcomputer for performing display control, a microcomputer for performing sound control, and a microcomputer for performing lamp control are provided, and a microcomputer for game control includes a display control command, a sound control command, and Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which a lamp control command is given and each microcomputer individually executes each control according to the command.

  (3) As the effect control means for controlling the effect control device including the variable display device 9 (control of the effect of the game), a display control microcomputer (provided on the display control board) for controlling the display of the variable display device 9 ) And an effect control microcomputer (provided on the effect control board) for effect control other than display control such as sound control and lamp control, and the game control microcomputer becomes an effect control microcomputer. Give commands for effect control including display control, sound control, and lamp control, and give display control commands from the effect control microcomputer to the display control microcomputer based on the effect control commands. Good. As a method of giving a display control command from the effect control microcomputer to the display control microcomputer, a display control command is created according to the contents of the display control instructed by the effect control command from the game control microcomputer. May be output (processed and output), and among the effect control commands from the game control microcomputer, a command for display control is output to the display control microcomputer as it is (without processing) May be output). When adopting a configuration in which a display control command is generated and output according to the content of display control instructed by the effect control command, the control content related to the effect can be determined on the effect control means side, and the determination is made accordingly. Can be unified with lamp, sound and display. Then, the effect control microcomputer that receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer side makes a decision regarding the effect on the effect control means side, and the determination result is determined on the game control microcomputer side. Display control commands that collectively show the control contents can be output to the display control microcomputer in accordance with the determination result of the control contents related to the presentation indicated by the control command, so that various decisions regarding the control contents are output. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the number of processing times.

  (4) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (5) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as a secondary re-lottery display effect, is a certain character changed into a certain change state as in a target game using a character 901 as shown in FIG. An example is shown in which the secondary re-lottery display is performed by displaying an image other than a decorative design, such as displaying whether or not the image is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to indicate whether or not a certain change state is brought about by variably displaying the decorative symbol and deriving and displaying the display result. Further, it may be possible to indicate whether or not a certain change state is brought about by variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols other than the decorative symbols and deriving and displaying the display result.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the secondary re-lottery display is always performed when a non-probable big hit is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be selected and determined at random whether or not the secondary re-lottery display is to be executed by using a random determination means such as a random counter when an uncertain change big hit.

  (8) In the embodiment described above, in the big hit game state, when a hit ball is won in the V winning area in the big winning opening while the big winning opening is open (during the round), and is detected by the V winning switch 22, An example is shown in which a continuation right occurs and the next round is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hitting balls is won in the big prize opening during each round (excluding the final round) and the big prize opening is opened without providing a V prize switch. Or when a certain period of time has elapsed since the big prize opening was opened (for example, 30 seconds in the 15R normal big hit game state and 15R probability variable big hit game state, 1 second in the 2R probability big hit game state) Control for shifting to the next round may be performed without fail.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the symbol stop command is used as the command for stopping the variation display of the decorative symbol is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and without using the symbol stop command, the display control microcomputer 800 monitors the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and after the variation display is started, the variation pattern command Control may be performed to stop the variation display of the decorative symbol when the variation time designated by is passed.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the display in the secondary re-lottery display at the timing immediately before the secondary re-lottery display is performed, as in the case of receiving the ending display command, as in the hit game process of FIG. An example of determining the results was given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display result in the secondary re-lottery display may be determined at the start of the variable display.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of executions of the secondary re-lottery display that can be executed in association with one fluctuation display is one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the secondary re-lottery display that can be executed in association with one variation display may be two or more predetermined times. In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the secondary re-lottery display is performed during the ending display is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the secondary re-lottery display may be performed during the big hit gaming state round, or may be performed during the big hit gaming state round.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the re-lottery display, an example is shown in which it is displayed whether or not the normal big hit is likely to rise to the probable big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the re-lottery display, a display indicating the transition of the probability / base state may be performed as follows. It may be indicated by a re-lottery display whether or not the low-accuracy low base state is achieved to the high-accuracy high base state. It may be indicated by a re-lottery display whether or not the low probability and low base state is achieved. It may be indicated by a re-lottery display whether or not the low-accuracy and low-base state is achieved. Further, it may be indicated by a re-lottery display whether or not the low-accuracy base state is achieved from the high-accuracy base state. Further, it may be indicated by a re-lottery display whether or not the high-accuracy and low-base state is achieved. As described above, the re-lottery display may be any display as long as it indicates whether or not the player is in an advantageous state from an unfavorable state for the player. Here, the distinction between an unfavorable state and an advantageous state for the player is an advantageous disadvantage when the state before and after the completion is relatively compared. For example, the high probability low base state is more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base with respect to the big hit probability, but the player is more favorable than the high probability high base state with respect to the base. It can be said that the situation is disadvantageous. Therefore, in the case of the rise from the high accuracy low base state to the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy low base state is a disadvantageous state for the player, and the high accuracy high base state is an advantageous state for the player.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the probability / base state is shifted to either the high-accuracy low base state or the high-accuracy high-base state when a high probability state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a high probability state is set, first, the high-accuracy high-base state is transferred, and then the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) and then the high-probability low-base state is transferred. You may control to do. As such a transition pattern of the probability / base state, only such a transition pattern may be selected when a high probability state is set, or a high accuracy as shown in the above-described embodiment may be selected. You may make it use as another option of the state transition added to the transition to a low base state and the transition to a high-accuracy base state.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the normal mode, the mission mode, the game mode according to the game state of the low accuracy low base state, the high accuracy low base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the low accuracy high base state, The example which performs each effect display of the probability change mode and the time-saving mode state was shown. However, not limited to this, based on the height of the base, the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base, high accuracy high base state) and low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state) In other words, according to each game state, the effect display in the high base mode and the low base mode may be performed. In such a case, in the above-described embodiment, the same mission effect as the mission effect performed in the low accuracy low base state is performed in the low accuracy low base state. When the condition is satisfied, an effect display similar to the effect display performed in the high base mode may be performed.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which when the low probability base state becomes a high probability state, the high probability low base state or the high accuracy high base state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the low probability base state becomes a high probability state, it may be controlled only to the high probability low base state, or may be controlled only to the high probability high base state. Good.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a big hit that ends in the second round (2R probability variable big hit) and a big hit that ends in the fifteenth round (15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit) has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the third to fourteenth rounds, for example, a big hit (7R big hit) that ends in the seventh round may be provided. As the 7R big hit, either one of the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit may be provided, or both may be provided. In that case, the 7R jackpot is set to be selected at a predetermined rate when it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the jackpot determination. When 7R big hit is selected, round control in the big hit gaming state is performed under the same conditions as in the case of 15R big hit (the opening time is the same time as 15R big hit). When using such a 7R jackpot, the 15R jackpot is controlled in the same way as the 7R jackpot until the seventh round in the jackpot gaming state, and only the decorative symbol is used in the interval period between the seventh and eighth rounds. After performing the effect display (for example, the display in which all symbols are started to be varied and then sequentially stopped in the order of left, right, and middle symbols), control after the eighth round is performed. .

  (17) A display that clearly indicates which of the four types of probabilities / base states a gaming state is based on a decorative symbol stop symbol or a re-lottery display result may be performed. In that case, when the power is turned off after receiving the symbol information command and the variation pattern command, which of the four types of probability / base states is to be obtained depending on the decorative symbol stop symbol or the re-lottery display result In order to show clearly, for example, the state which will be set after a big hit gaming state is specified by a hit start command and an ending display command.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a false mission mode (second mission mode) is provided in the mission mode has been described. The false mode may be performed between any states as long as the bases are in the same state, such as the relationship between the high accuracy base and the low accuracy base. As such a fake mode, the following effect control mode may be provided. For example, as a production control mode corresponding to a high accuracy and high base that is controlled when a big hit to shift to a high accuracy and high base state occurs, the mode ends when a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are performed, and the mode shifts to the time reduction mode. As a false mode for this, an effect similar to the high-accuracy high-base-adaptive effect control mode is performed, but even after a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, The continuous mode may be provided as it is in the high base state. In addition, as a fake mode, for example, when the background image changes according to the effect control mode, a special effect such as a mission effect is displayed, such as displaying the same background image as in the true mode as the fake mode. It may not be performed.

  (19) Instead of the high base state shown in the above-described embodiment, an example involving a special symbol variation time reduction state is shown as a high probability state and a probability / base state. As the state, a high base state that does not accompany the special symbol variation time reduction state may be used. Further, instead of the high base state, a state where only the special symbol variation time reduction state is used may be used.

  (20) In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which both the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 800 perform control by grasping the probability / base state and effect control mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability / base state is grasped on the game control microcomputer 560 side, but the effect control mode is not grasped, and the effect control mode is grasped on the effect control microcomputer 800 side. The above-described control may be performed without grasping the state. In this case, for example, it is desirable not to provide control that makes it difficult to match the control contents between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 800 as in the high-accuracy notification mode described above. When such a configuration is adopted, the game control microcomputer 560 side grasps and controls the probability / base state, and the effect control microcomputer 800 side grasps and controls the effect control mode. Thus, control as shown in the above-described embodiment can be performed. When such a configuration is adopted, since it is not necessary to specify the effect control mode by the command by the effect control command, the symbol information command and the variation pattern command as shown in the above-described embodiment are used. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of types of hit start commands and ending display commands in order to perform control such as secondary re-lottery display even when the power is turned off after reception. For this reason, when such a configuration is employed, only one type of hit start command and ending display command may be provided.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the display result of the decorative symbol that is the 2R probability variation big hit is the same as the display result of the decorative symbol that is the small hit is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display result of the decorative symbol that is a 2R probability variation big hit may be different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is a small hit. In that case, when a mission effect is performed, after the display results of different decorative symbols are derived and displayed, the special winning opening is opened twice, and then the same mission effect is performed. In addition, when doing this, for example, the display result of the decorative symbol that is the 2R probability variation big hit is different from the display result of the decorative symbol that is the small hit, but the display results are similar so that it is difficult to easily distinguish these display results. It is preferable to obtain a display result (for example, a similar display result or the like in which a plurality of predetermined symbols are changed as a display result of a combination of symbols by changing the left, middle and right arrangements). .

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, for each of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning device 20 is set to a period shorter than the predetermined period (30 seconds) determined for the 15R big hit (1 Second), and an example of changing to the first state (open state) by a number (2 times) smaller than the predetermined number (15 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for each of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special variable prize-winning device 20 is set to a period (one second) shorter than a predetermined period (30 seconds) and the predetermined number of times ( What is necessary is just to change to a 1st state (open state) by at least any of the frequency | count (2 times) less than 15 times. Therefore, in each of the 2R probability variable big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning device 20 is in the first state for a predetermined period (30 seconds) and a number of times (two times) less than the predetermined number (15 times). (The open state) may be changed, and the special variable prize-winning apparatus 20 is in the first state (open state) for a period (1 second) shorter than a predetermined period (30 seconds) and for a predetermined number of times (15 times). It may be changed to.

The contents disclosed in the above embodiment include the following.
(1) A start area (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in which a predetermined start condition is established when a game medium (game ball) provided in the game area (game area 7) enters, and that the start condition is established Based on a variation display device (variation display device 9) for performing variability display of a plurality of types of identification information (decorative symbols) each identifiable on the basis thereof and deriving and displaying a display result, it is provided in the game area and is advantageous to the player Variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed to any one of a first state (open state) and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, the variable display device When the display result of the variation display of the identification information in FIG. 2 becomes a predetermined specific display result (a jackpot display result), a specific gaming state (for a player who changes the variable winning means to the first state) Big hit A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) controlled by
As the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (15R normal big hit, 15R probability big hit A, 15R probability big big hit) in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period (30 seconds) a predetermined number of times (15 times). B) first specific gaming state control means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S41, S43a, S43b in FIG. 53, S452, S453, S456 in FIG. 57, S146 in FIG. 51),
As the specific game state, a second specific game state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period (one second) shorter than the predetermined period and a number (two times) less than the predetermined number of times. Second specific gaming state control means (game controlling microcomputer 560, S41, S43a in FIG. 53, S454, S455, S456 in FIG. 57, S146 in FIG. 51) for controlling to (2R probability variation big hit A, 2R probability variation big hit B) When,
Prior decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state, whether to control to the first specific gaming state, or to control to the second specific gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display (Game control microcomputer 560, S25 in FIG. 52, S41 in FIG. 53),
The predetermining means further has a probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result when the normal state is different from the specific game state as the state after the second specific game state than the normal state. 1st high probability state (highly accurate low base state) in which the ease of entering the game medium into the starting area is the same as the normal gaming state, or the display result of the variable display is the specific display The resulting probability is the same as the first high probability state, and control is made to a second high probability state (highly accurate base) set so that the game medium can enter the starting area more easily than the first high probability state. If it is in the second high probability state, it is determined to control to the second high probability state (S704 to S709 in FIG. 61, S721 in FIG. 63, FIG. 17).

  As an effect of this disclosure, the state after the second specific gaming state is determined to be controlled to the first high probability state or the second high probability state in the normal state, and the second high probability state In this case, it is determined to control to the second high probability state. Thereby, even if it is the same specific game state about the 2nd specific game state which changes a variable winning means to a 1st state at least in any one of a period shorter than a predetermined period, and a frequency | count less than a predetermined number, a specific game state Since the state to be transferred differs depending on the state at the time of occurrence of the game, the player can be strongly interested in how the game state shifts with respect to the transition of the game state due to the specific game state. Further, by obtaining such an effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the transition of the gaming state due to the specific gaming state. Further, in any state of being controlled in the normal state and in the state of being controlled in the second high probability state, when the second specific gaming state is set, the player is in a state more disadvantageous than the current state. Since it does not shift, it can be prevented that the player's expectation is lowered due to the second specific gaming state.

  (2) The effect state control means controls the specific effect state until the identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times after the second game state or the third game state ends, and the pre-determined 68. When the means for determining to control to the second gaming state is determined by means and when it is determined to control to the third gaming state, the rendering mode when the specific rendering state ends is different (FIG. 68). S277, S278, S281, S283).

  As an effect of this disclosed content, it is controlled that the specific presentation state is controlled until the variation display of the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times after the second gaming state or the third gaming state is finished, and the second gaming state is controlled. Since the effect mode when the specific effect state ends is different between when it is determined and when it is determined to control to the third gaming state, the display result of the variable display is specified by looking at the effect mode The player can guess what state the probability of the display result is.

(3) When the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes a predetermined special display result (probability variation jackpot display result) among the specific display results, the high probability state after the specific gaming state ends Controlled by
Game control means (main board 31, game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and outputting a control signal for controlling the variable display device;
Effect control means (effect control board 80, effect control microcomputer 800) for controlling the effect control device including the variable display device based on the control signal from the game control means;
The game control means includes
The pre-determining means;
When the pre-determining means decides to enter the first specific gaming state, the specific display result other than the special display result is temporarily stopped, and then the special display result and the special display result are specified. First effect display execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first effect display (first re-lottery display shown in (i3) to (i4) of FIG. 35) for deriving and displaying one of the display results (FIG. 35). S63 and S68 in 46 variation pattern setting processes (determining whether or not the primary re-lottery is performed together with the variation pattern),
When the pre-determining means determines that the first specific gaming state is set, after the first specific gaming state is started, the display result of the variable display is the specific display result on the variable display device. Second effect display indicating whether or not the probability of becoming a state improved from the normal state (secondary re-lottery display shown in (j3) to (j5) and (k3) to (k5) of FIG. 36) Second effect display execution determining means (S52, S55 in the decorative symbol information determining process of FIG. 54) for determining whether or not to execute
As the control signal, when the variation display of the identification information is started, the determination result by the first effect display execution determining means and the variation from the start of the variation display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed Fluctuation display start command transmitting means (S70 in FIG. 55, S108 in FIG. 48) for transmitting a variation display start command (variation pattern command in FIG. 23) indicating the display time and the execution start of variation display of the identification information;
When starting the variable display of the identification information, as a control signal, a result command transmission unit (S49 in FIG. 53) that transmits a result command (symbol information command in FIG. 23) indicating a determination result by the prior determination unit. S108) of FIG. 48,
After the first specific gaming state is started, a second effect display command (in FIG. 24) indicating, as the control signal, a determination result by the prior determination unit and a determination result by the second effect display execution determination unit. Second effect display command transmission means (S87 in FIG. 56, S171 in FIG. 58, S108 in FIG. 48) for transmitting a hit start command and an ending display command),
At least one of the variable display start command and the result command indicates a determination result by the second effect display execution determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 23, the symbol information command indicates whether or not the secondary re-lottery display is executed). Show),
The production control means includes
In the variation display device, when the variation display time based on the variation display start command has elapsed after starting the variation display of the identification information based on the variation display start command transmitted by the variation display start command transmission means. Fluctuation display control means for deriving and displaying the display result (S401 to S403 in FIG. 67),
When the variable display start command transmitted by the variable display start command transmission means indicates that the first effect display is to be executed, first effect display execution control means (FIG. 68) that executes the first effect display. S286 to S289, S291 to S296 in FIG. 71, symbol stop waiting process in S403 in FIG. 67),
Before the first effect display is executed, the second effect display is performed by at least one of the change display start command and the result command indicating a determination result by the second effect display execution determining unit. Result command determination means (S255 in FIG. 69) for determining whether or not to execute
After the second effect display command transmission means is transmitted by the second effect display command transmission means, at least one of the change display start command and the result command indicating the determination result by the second effect display execution determination means. Second effect determination for determining whether at least one of the command and the second effect display command transmitted by the second effect display command transmission means indicates that the second effect display is to be executed. Means (S310 in FIG. 72);
Second effect display execution control means for executing the second effect display when the second effect determining means indicates that the second effect display is to be executed after the first specific gaming state is started. (S318 to S323 in FIG. 72),
The production control means includes
It is indicated that the first effect display is to be executed by the variable display start command (S249Y in FIG. 69), and that the result command determining means indicates that the second effect display is to be executed. When the result command is executed (S255Y in FIG. 69), the probability that the result command of the variable display becomes the specific display result after the specific game state is ended by the predetermining means is improved from the normal state. When it is shown that the determination to control is made (S251Y in FIG. 69), the first effect display execution control means causes the first effect display to display a specific display result other than the special display result ( (Non-probability variable big hit display result) is derived and displayed (S257 in FIG. 69), and the second effect display execution control means performs the previous display after the end of the specific gaming state in the second effect display. The fact that the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved from the normal state (the fact that the probability change mode in FIG. 35, the mission mode is entered) is displayed (S318 in FIG. 72). ).

  As an effect of this disclosure, as an effect performed in the variable display device, after temporarily stopping a specific display result other than the special display result, a first effect display for deriving and displaying any type of specific display result; It is possible to execute the second effect display indicating whether or not the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved from the normal state. In this way, by providing multiple types of effect display indicating whether the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved from the normal state, variations of the effect display become rich, The player's interest can be enhanced from the aspect of the effect display. Further, since the second effect display is performed after the specific game state is started, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the specific game state.

  Further, execution of the first effect display is instructed based on the change display start command, and at least one of the change display start command and the result command and at least one of the second effect display command When the execution of the second effect display is instructed based on the above, the determination that the result command is controlled to a state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result after completion of the specific gaming state is improved from the normal state In the first effect display, the specific display result other than the special display result is derived and displayed, and the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second effect display is higher than the normal state. Will be displayed in an improved state. Thereby, after the end of the specific gaming state, the first effect display before the second effect display is performed in the variable display when the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved from the normal state. Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of effect display such as displaying that the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved from the normal state. In addition, the second effect display command instructs whether or not to display that the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by executing the second effect display is improved from the normal state. Therefore, in the second effect display, it can be prevented that the display indicating that the probability of the specific display result is improved from the normal state is erroneously indicated.

  Also, at least one of a variable display start command and a result command transmitted at different timings such as when the variable display is started and after the specific gaming state is started, and the second effect display command The execution of the second effect display is instructed when at least one of these commands indicates that the second effect display is to be executed. Judgment is made. Thus, since it is shown that the second effect display is performed using a plurality of commands transmitted at different timings, for example, at least one of a variable display start command and a result command, or When the effect control means misses the second effect display command, and after the effect control means captures at least one of the variable display start command and the result command, the power of the gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure or the like Even when the second effect display based on one command cannot be executed, as in the case of the case, the second effect display can be executed based on the other command such as the second effect display command. .

(4) A game control microcomputer that has a built-in random number circuit for generating random numbers, executes a game control process for controlling the progress of the game, and outputs a control signal for controlling the variable display device (the game shown in FIG. 4) A control microcomputer 560),
The random number circuit includes:
A clock signal generating means (clock signal output circuit 524 in FIG. 6) for generating a clock signal of a predetermined period and outputting it to the random number circuit;
Numerical value updating means (counter 521 in FIG. 6) for updating numerical data in a predetermined order from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value within a predetermined range in which numerical data can be updated based on the input of the clock signal. )When,
Random number storage means (random value storage circuit 531 in FIG. 6) for storing numerical data updated by the numerical value update means as a random value,
The game control microcomputer is:
Random number circuit initial setting means (a part for executing S15 in FIG. 43 in the game control microcomputer 560) for initial setting of the random number circuit when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
After the random number circuit initial setting means performs the initial setting of the random number circuit, the interrupt setting means (S16 in FIG. 43 in the game control microcomputer 560 is set to generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time). Part to execute)
Interrupt processing execution means for executing timer interrupt processing including the game control processing (processing of S102 to S115 (except for S109 and S112) in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 48) when the timer interrupt occurs (Part of S101 to S116 in FIG. 48 in the game control microcomputer 560),
In the timer interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means, random number reading means for reading the random number value stored in the random number storage means when the start condition is satisfied (S132 of FIG. 51 in the game control microcomputer 560). Part to execute)
The pre-determining means,
The predetermination means determines whether or not to control the specific gaming state by determining whether or not the random number value read by the random number reading means matches a predetermined determination value (game control) Part of the microcomputer 560 for executing S25 of FIG. 52),
In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means identifies the game control microcomputer in which the predetermined initial value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value update means is assigned to each game control microcomputer. 46 is set based on the microcomputer identification information (ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560) (the part for executing S154b in FIG. 46 in the game control microcomputer 560).

  As an effect of this disclosure, the game control microcomputer performs initial setting of the random number circuit from the start of power-on to the game machine until the timer interrupt is set, and the microcomputer identification information is set in the initial setting. Since the base value is set as the initial value of the random number, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be improved. In addition, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and by generating a capture signal using a radio signal to a gaming machine It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state from being illegally established.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  7 gaming area, 15 variable winning ball device, 9 variable display device, 20 special variable winning ball device, 560 microcomputer for game control, 800 microcomputer for production control, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 31 main board, 80 production control board, 524 clock signal output circuit, 521 counter, 531 random value storage circuit, 56 CPU, 503a 12-bit random number circuit, 503b 16-bit random number circuit.

Claims (1)

A start area where a predetermined start condition is established when a game medium provided in the game area enters, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied are displayed and displayed. A variable display device for deriving and displaying a result; and variable winning means provided in the game area and capable of changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state unfavorable to the player. When the display result of the variation display of the identification information on the variation display device becomes a predetermined specific display result, the specific game state is advantageous to the player who changes the variable winning means to the first state. A controlled gaming machine,
First gaming state control means for controlling the variable winning means as a first gaming state for a predetermined number of times to change the variable winning means to the first state for a predetermined period as the specific gaming state;
After executing the second gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period or a number less than the predetermined number , the display result of the variable display is the specific display. A second gaming state control means for controlling to a high probability state in which the resulting probability is improved over the normal state ;
After executing the third gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for the same period as the second gaming state and the same number of times as the second gaming state, the variable winning means is changed to the first state. A third gaming state control means for controlling to the previous gaming state;
Whether to control to the specific gaming state, whether to control to the first gaming state , whether to control to the second gaming state , and whether to control to the third gaming state Predetermining means for determining the display result of the display before deriving and displaying it,
The pre-determining means further includes the display result of the variable display as the state after the second gaming state when the gaming state when it is determined to control to the second gaming state is the normal state. The first high probability state in which the probability of being a display result is higher than that in the normal state and the ease of entry of the game medium into the starting area is the same as the normal state, or the display result of the variable display is the Deciding to control to the second high probability state in which the probability of the specific display result is the same as the first high probability state and the game medium is more likely to enter the starting area than the first high probability state and, wherein when the game state when a determination is made to control of the second high-probability state to the second game condition, determines that the state after the second game condition is controlled to the second high-probability state And
The specific game state when the game state when it is determined to control to the specific game state is the normal state and the high probability state including the first high probability state and the second high probability state The rate controlled to the high probability state as the later state is the same,
It is an effect mode that is performed corresponding to the normal state in each of the first high probability state after being controlled to the second gaming state and the normal state after being controlled to the third gaming state. It further includes an effect state control means for performing control to switch to a specific effect state that is a common effect mode different from the normal effect state,
The effect state control means is configured such that when the change to the specific effect state is performed after the control to the second gaming state, the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is the specific display result. Until this time, a control for switching to the normal performance state is not performed .

Images